OmiCheck

Operating Instructions

www.omitec.com

OmiCheck
Scan Tool
Operating Instructions
Part Number I?????? EN Issue 1 Omitec 2010

Part Number I319590 EN - Issue 1

Omitec 2010

Contents
Introduction
Overview................................................................................................. Kit Contents ............................................................................................ Keypads.................................................................................................. Connection ............................................................................................. Applications ............................................................................................ Safety Precautions ................................................................................. Getting Started ....................................................................................... General Information................................................................................ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9

EOBD
What is EOBD? .................................................................................... Identifying Compliant Vehicles ............................................................. Diagnostic Trouble Codes .................................................................... Interpreting EOBD Fault Codes............................................................ Using OmiCheck................................................................................... 11 12 13 14 15

FastCheck
Introduction........................................................................................... Safety Instructions ................................................................................ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........................................................... Airbag ................................................................................................... Climate ................................................................................................. EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)............................................................ SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) ............................................................... Service.................................................................................................. TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)........................................... 21 22 24 27 31 33 49 53 69

Contents
Manufacturer Applications
General ................................................................................................. 77 Audi, Seat, Skoda and Volkswagen ..................................................... 78 BMW ................................................................................................... 194 Citroen and Peugeot........................................................................... 194 Fiat, Alfa and Lancia ........................................................................... 210 Ford .................................................................................................... 215 GM Opel/Vauxhall .............................................................................. 231 Honda ................................................................................................. 233 Land Rover ......................................................................................... 237 Mercedes ............................................................................................ 244 MG Rover ........................................................................................... 245 Mitsubishi............................................................................................ 247 Nissan................................................................................................. 249 Renault ............................................................................................... 250

User Menu
Overview............................................................................................. 255 Security............................................................................................... 258

Appendix A: Glossary
Glossary of terms ............................................................................... 260

Appendix B: Cables
Cable Identification ............................................................................. 267

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Diagnostic Connector Locations ......................................................... 271

ii

Contents
Appendix D: Manual Service Reset
Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)....................................................... Alfa Romeo......................................................................................... Audi .................................................................................................... BMW................................................................................................... Citroen ................................................................................................ Fiat...................................................................................................... Ford .................................................................................................... GM Vauxhall/Opel .............................................................................. Lancia ................................................................................................. Land Rover ......................................................................................... Mercedes............................................................................................ Peugeot .............................................................................................. Renault ............................................................................................... Smart .................................................................................................. Volkswagen ........................................................................................ Volvo................................................................................................... 285 285 286 287 289 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 308 313 314 315

iii

Introduction
Introduction

Overview
All new road vehicles and many older vehicles are fitted with one or more control modules that monitor and control aspects of the vehicle, e.g. Engine, Transmission, ABS, Airbag etc.

OM1563

The OmiCheck is a scan tool that connects to the vehicle's control modules via the diagnostic socket and enables the operator to extract information from the various modules. For instance fault codes and live data plus other data and functions supported by the control module. The OmiCheck is supplied with the software to interrogate vehicle systems that conform to the European On-board Diagnostics (EOBD) standard. The EOBD standard is designed to extract emissions related data from the power train system of the vehicle. This will be the engine controller, of which there may be more than one, and the transmission controller if this is electronically controlled. Other test applications are available for non-EOBD systems and a number may be loaded on to the OmiCheck along with the EOBD application. It is recommended that a first time user reads through these instructions and safety guidelines and becomes familiar with the layout and content prior to commencing any testing on a vehicle.

Introduction
Kit Contents
The OmiCheck is available in two different configurations, Service and Professional. Although the same components are supplied in both kits, the software is different between the two.

OmiCheck Service and Professional kit contents

1
3

4 2
OM1569

The basic kit includes: 1. OmiCheck. 2. J1962 cable. 3. USB cable. 4. CD ROM.

Introduction
Keypads
The OmiCheck is operated via the two keypads.

Left-hand keypad

OM1571

Key

Function
Scrolls left and right. Provides context sensitive help (where available).

Right-hand keypad

OM1570

Key

Function
Scrolls up within a menu or text. Scrolls down within a menu or text. Selects a menu option, Continue or Yes. Exits a menu or No.

Introduction
Connection
1

OM1568

1. 25- way D-type diagnostic connector socket The diagnostic lead connector is located on the bottom edge of the OmiCheck, and is used to connect the appropriate vehicle communications cable to the OmiCheck. See Cables, page 267. NOTE: Always secure the diagnostic cable with the fixing screws to prevent accidental disconnection of the tester during use. 2. USB connector socket The USB connector socket is located on the bottom edge of the OmiCheck, and is used to connect to a PC to download software updates.

Introduction
Applications
The OmiCheck can be used in two ways:

Stand-alone Module

OM1565

As a stand-alone module, the OmiCheck can read live data, and is able to read and clear DTCs. Power for the OmiCheck is supplied via the diagnostic connector and therefore does not require a separate power supply.

Download Mode

OM1566

The OmiCheck can be used away from the vehicle to download software updates.

Introduction
Safety Precautions
The following guidelines are intended to ensure the safety of the operator whilst preventing damage to the electrical and electronic components fitted to the vehicle. Equipment - prior to commencing any test procedure on the vehicle, ensure that the tester, its harnesses and connectors are in good condition. Polarity - always observe the correct polarity when connecting the tester to the vehicle battery. Before carrying out testing on a vehicle, the following procedure should always be observed: Check the handbrake/parking brake is on. Check that neutral or park is selected. Keep test equipment and harnesses away from HT leads. Be aware of moving engine parts. Do not run engine in a confined space without adequate ventilation.

Introduction
Getting Started
Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle's diagnostic connector. Once connected, the message System Configuration. Please Wait... appears briefly on the OmiCheck's display before displaying the current software version number.

Unlocking New Units

A new or updated OmiCheck requires a security code to unlock the specific applications. To register the OmiCheck and to obtain your security code, call the Product Support Team on +44 (0)844 665 7681 or complete the activation form and Fax to +44 (0)844 665 7605 or email support@omitec.com. You will require your serial number (located on the back of the unit) and product key (located on the front of the CD wallet). After obtaining your security code, follow this procedure to unlock your OmiCheck. 1. Select User Menu from the main menu. 2. Select Security from the user menu. 3. Select Enter Security Key from the security menu. 4. Using the and keys, scroll through the alpha/numerical character list. key. 5. Confirm each character by pressing the

If you make a mistake use the key and enter the correct character. To re-enter the code from the beginning, press the key. 6. When prompted to verify the security key, press to confirm.

7. Power down the OmiCheck by disconnecting the power source. 8. Reconnect the power supply to restart the OmiCheck. The screen should now show EOBD and a list of the applications included.

Unlocked Unit
When unlocked the main menu for the OmiCheck will be displayed listing all the applications available on your OmiCheck. NOTE: The applications listed in the MAIN MENU are dependent on the level of OmiCheck purchased. Extra applications can be purchased separately. For further details, please consult your distributor. 9. Use the Press and keys to select the required menu function.

to confirm the selection.

Introduction
Troubleshooting
Problem Communication problems between OmiCheck and vehicle. NOTE: Typical message is "Data Link Error" Check: Check application list for vehicle coverage and harness used (including switch settings if applicable). Check correct system was selected from the OmiCheck menu. Vehicle connectors are free from grease. Connectors for bent or missing pins Connections fully mate. If cable requires external power from the battery. Vehicle immobiliser is disabled. Control module is fully reset by turning ignition off, waiting 30 seconds then turning ignition back on before retrying comms. The OmiCheck is powered from a 12V dc power supply unit supplied or vehicle. COM Port configuration is correct i.e. set to the COM Port that the unit is connected to. If serial to USB drivers are installed (if required).

Communication problems between OmiCheck and PC. NOTE: Typical messages are "No replyTrying again" and "Comms Lost Check Cable".

If communications still cannot be established, contact the Product Support desk for further assistance.

Introduction
General Information
Cleaning
To maintain the condition and serviceability of the OmiCheck, it is advisable to follow the cleaning procedures below WARNING: Do not use solvents such as petroleum based cleaning agents, acetone, petrol, trichlorethylene etc. These types of harsh solvent may seriously damage the plastic casing. Do not even spray or pour this type of cleaner onto a cleaning cloth. WARNING: The OmiCheck is not waterproof. Always dry the unit thoroughly after cleaning or if it has been subject to accidental spillage. The manufacturer recommends that you periodically inspect and clean the following parts of the OmiCheck: Case Display screen Keypad Adaptor cables and connectors To clean the OmiCheck, or any of its cables or connectors, apply a mild detergent solution to a soft clean cloth that has been suitably dampened. WARNING: Before cleaning, disconnect the OmiCheck from the vehicle.

Display Screen
During normal everyday use, the screen may become dusty or covered in grime. To clean the screen, always use a soft, clean, antistatic cloth. If any stubborn stains or marks remain, use a non-abrasive glass cleaner applied to a soft, clean cloth. Gently wipe the cloth across the display until the marks have been removed.

Introduction
Specification
OmiCheck complies with ISO/DIS 15031 Part 4 as an EOBD OmiCheck Voltage requirements - 8.0 Volts to 16.0 Volts DC Current requirement - 750mA max Display - 20 characters by 4 lines LCD with LED back light Operating Temperature range - 0C to 50C

Declaration of Conformity
The OmiCheck is CE marked and complies with the following directives: EN55022:1998 - ITE Emissions di(Class A) EN50082-1:1998 - Generic EMC Immunity EN60950:1992 - Safety Requirements FCC47 Part 15 - Radio Frequency Devices (Class A) A copy of the Declaration of Conformity certificate is available on request from the manufacturer or your supplier.

10

EOBD
EOBD

What is EOBD?
The American Environmental Protection Agency and the European parliament have set targets for reducing the levels of pollution produced by passenger and commercial vehicles. In order to ensure that these targets can be met, manufacturers are required to build new vehicles which meet increasingly stiff emissions standards. The manufacturers must further maintain these emission standards for the useful life of the vehicle. In order to meet and maintain these standards the vehicles are fitted with On-Board Diagnostic systems which monitor the integrity and effectiveness of all emission related components. As vehicles are becoming more and more complex, many of the systems fitted to them are being controlled by electronic control modules. Most vehicles now have multiple control modules (e.g. Engine, Transmission, Body, Suspension, etc.) located at different locations on the vehicle. The On-Board Diagnostic systems are integrated into the vehicle control modules. With so many different vehicle and component manufacturers, a common interface was required to communicate with these control modules. In 1988, the SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) created a standard that defined a standard diagnostic socket (J1962) and a set of diagnostic test signals. With the diagnostic socket and diagnostic signals agreed, another standard was produced that defined a universal inspection and diagnosis method to ensure that a vehicle is performing to Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) specifications. This standard is known as EOBD (European On-Board Diagnostics). The fundamental requirement for an EOBD system is that in the event of an emissions related component fault, a DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) will be stored in the memory of the control module responsible for that component, and a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate on the vehicle's instrument pack to alert the driver. The DTC can then be retrieved using diagnostic equipment to determine the type and status of the fault.

11

EOBD
Identifying Compliant Vehicles
All petrol engine vehicles manufactured since 2000 should be EOBD compliant. Some manufacturers began incorporating On-Board Diagnostic systems as early as 1994, however not all are 100% compliant. All diesel engine vehicles are expected to have support from 2004. This means that diagnostic information, related to vehicle emissions, may be extracted from the vehicle via the J1962 diagnostic socket using the OmiCheck. The OmiCheck can communicate with any EOBD compliant vehicle using one of the five diagnostic communication protocols defined in the standard. These are ISO 9141 Keyword 2000 (originally a European protocol) J1850 PWM (pulse width modulated) protocol used by Ford J1850 VPW (variable pulse width modulated) used by General Motors in USA designed vehicles CAN (controller area network) currently being legislated for and likely to be a principle diagnostic communication system in the future. A European protocol. It is normally possible to tell which is used on a specific vehicle by examining the diagnostic socket (as below), however the OmiCheck's software will automatically detect the protocol used on the vehicle to which it is connected.
16 9

OM1038

If the diagnostic socket has a pin in the 7 or 15 position, then the vehicle uses either the ISO 9141 or Keyword 2000 protocol. If the diagnostic socket has a pin in the 2 or 10 position, then the vehicle uses one of the SAE J1850 protocols. If the diagnostic socket has a pin in the 6 or 14 position, then the vehicle uses the CAN protocol.

NOTE: Although there are different EOBD electrical connection protocols, the command set is fixed according to the SAE J1979 standard.

12

EOBD
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are divided into mandatory and voluntary codes. Mandatory codes are allocated by the ISO (International Standards Organisation)/ SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers). Voluntary codes are allocated by various vehicle manufacturers and are manufacturer specific and in some instances, vehicle specific. ISO/SAE controlled diagnostic trouble codes are those codes where industry uniformity has been achieved. These codes were felt to be common enough across most manufacturer's applications that a common number and fault message could be assigned. All unspecified numbers in each grouping have been reserved for future growth. Although service procedures may differ widely amongst manufacturers, the fault being indicated is common enough to be assigned a particular fault code. Codes in this area are not to be used by manufacturers until they have been approved by ISO/SAE. Areas within each of the fault code blocks have been allocated for manufacturer controlled DTCs. These are fault codes that will not generally be used by the majority of the manufacturers due to basic system, implementation, or diagnostic strategy differences.

13

EOBD
Interpreting EOBD Fault Codes
Use the following rules to determine the basic meaning of an EOBD fault code.
P B C U Powertrain Body Chassis Network

The first character indicates which area of the vehicle the code applies to.
0 1 Standard (SAE) code Manufacturer's own code

The second character specifies the type of code:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fuel and air metering Fuel and air metering, specifically injector circuit Ignition system and misfire detection Auxiliary emission controls Vehicle speed control and idle control system Computer output circuit Transmission related faults Transmission related faults

If the first character was 'P' (Powertrain) then the third character identifies the specific Powertrain system concerned: The last two characters identify the specific fault as seen by the on-board systems.

14

EOBD
Using OmiCheck
Connection and Basic Operation
1. Connect cable (SB100/10) to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing screws. 2. Ensure the vehicle's ignition switch is in the '0' position.
16 9

OM1038

J1962 Diagnostic socket

3. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicle via the J1962 diagnostic socket. This socket is usually located inside the passenger compartment. Refer to vehicle manufacturers' information for the exact location. Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the diagnostic socket. When connected to the diagnostic socket, the OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then the screen will display the date of the current software version before displaying the main menu. 4. Use the and keys to select the EOBD menu function. Press to confirm the selection. 5. Turn the ignition on when prompted, then press the key to confirm. The OmiCheck will then attempt to establish communication with the vehicle's On-Board Diagnostics. If the vehicle system is not EOBD compliant or there is a connection problem, the "Please Wait" screen will be replaced with help screens. If communication with the On-Board Diagnostics is successful, then the display will report that the OmiCheck is checking the vehicle's Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Readiness tests. NOTE: The vehicles ignition MUST be on for successful communication with the vehicle control modules. 6. The tester checks to see which of the I/M Readiness tests have been run and successfully completed and then the screen will inform you of the status. Press the key to continue. NOTE: The OmiCheck will always check the status of the I/M Readiness tests before displaying the EOBD Operations menu. 7. The screen will then give you the option of viewing the status of the tests performed on the emission related systems and their components. Press the key to display the results. Press the key to bypass the results and go to the EOBD Operations menu.

15

EOBD
EOBD OPERATIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. MIL Status View DTCs Erase DTCs Live Data O2 Sensor Tests View Freeze Frame Non-Continuous Continuous Tests System Control Vehicle Info OBD Status System Readiness Print Menu General Info Tester Setup

8. Use the and selection.

keys to select the required function and press

to confirm the

Easy Reset Facility

To reset the OmiCheck without disconnecting from the vehicle, hold down the & keys simultaneously. , ,

Menu Options
Not all vehicle control modules will support all of the options available from the menu. If an option is not supported the OmiCheck will display either Not supported or Not available. This is a limitation of the software on the vehicle control modules and NOT a fault with the OmiCheck.

MIL Status/MI Status

'MIL Status' or 'MI Status' displays the status of the malfunction indicator lamp for each emissions related control module. If the status of the MIL is set to On, one or more DTCs will be stored in the vehicle's control modules and the instrument panel MIL will be illuminated.

16

EOBD
View DTCs
This option allows any 'Stored' or 'Pending' emission related DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) to be viewed. If any DTC is present, it will be displayed along with the identity of the Control Module (CM) that registered the fault. If more than one DTC is displayed, the required DTC can be selected by using the and keys. Press to select the DTC and display the description of the code. Dependent upon the DTC and the vehicle manufacturer, it may be necessary to select the manufacturer and possibly also the model of the vehicle to enable the correct description to be displayed. This setting will be retained while the OmiCheck is being used for EOBD operations but can be redefined or cleared under the 'Manufacturer' menu option.

Erase DTCs
This option will clear all 'Stored' and 'Pending' emission related DTCs, clear 'Freeze Frame' DTCs and associated data, clear Oxygen Sensor test data, clear 'Non-Continuous' test results and reset the status of the 'System Readiness' tests on the control modules on the vehicle. The tester will then perform a 'Read DTCs' operation to verify that the DTCs have been erased.

Live Data
This option allows the user to view the current status of the emission system components on the vehicle and can provide a quick way of telling if a component is working correctly. The list of components monitored under 'Live Data' can vary between manufacturers and even between model.

17

EOBD
O2 Sensor Tests
EOBD has an optional mode for monitoring the oxygen sensor test results depending on the method used by the vehicle manufacturer to comply with the requirement for oxygen sensor monitoring. If the manufacturer does use this mode not all tests need to be supported. The tester will display the supported tests and the data associated with those tests e.g. Maximum sensor voltage for a test cycle (calculated).

View Freeze Frame

Freeze frame data is a snap-shot of live data that was stored in the control module at the moment a Diagnostic Trouble Code was recognised. If a number of faults occurred, then the freeze frame data stored is associated with the last fault to occur. The DTC that generated the freeze frame data is also displayed in the data.

Non-Continuous
Some vehicle systems are not monitored continuously during normal running conditions, e.g. catalysts and evaporative systems. These tests are manufacturer specific, so while the results of the test will be shown, the meaning of the results cannot.

Continuous Tests (Pending DTCs)

When the 'continuous monitor' detects a failure condition in an emission-related powertrain component or system, only once in a drive cycle, it stores a 'Pending' code in the control module's memory. If the continuous monitor detects the same failure condition during the next drive cycle, it registers a DTC and illuminates the MIL.

System Control
Components on the vehicle may be turned on and off, or pulsed to test their operation. These tests are manufacturer specific and are currently seldom supported in controllers.

Vehicle Info
Information is displayed relating to the vehicle. This may be the VIN, controller version numbers etc., but is not supported by all vehicles.

OBD Status
Indicates to the user whether or not the controller supports OBD requirements. Not all vehicles support this.

18

EOBD
System Readiness
When the ignition is turned on at the start of a test, the controller performs a number of tests on the system. If the conditions are not correct for the controller to perform the test e.g. if the engine is too cold, "Not Ready" status will be reported. Readiness test status is also offered for inspection after communications have been established. These may be reviewed or ignored until later. The tester allows the user to do continual reads of the status of the System Readiness tests i.e. whether the test is not supported, waiting to complete or has completed. This status can help a technician verify a repair in that they can check that the readiness tests that may have generated a DTC have run to completion. The following sub menu will let the user display the results in two ways.
SYSTEM READINESS 1. 2. Show As A List All On One Screen

The option Show As A List will give the user the options of 'DTCs Last Cleared' and 'Current Drive Cycle'. The selection 'DTCs Last Cleared' is normally found on all EOBD vehicles and shows the status since the last clearing of DTCs, but it may not be valid for the current drive cycle. The option 'Current Drive Cycle' will display the status of the tests for the current drive cycle, but this is rarely supported on vehicles at this time. The option 'All On One Screen will show an abbreviated text version of the status for all the tests since 'DTCs Last Cleared'. In both cases the tester is continually updating the status displayed for each test.

Tester Setup
This allows the user to select the units displayed in Live Data and Freeze Frame from either metric or imperial. The user may also select from abbreviated text or full text phrases. For more information, see Tester Setup, page 256.

19

EOBD
Main Menu Availability Manufacturer Specific Applications
WARNING: It is recommended that you obtain an updated security key from the Product Support team before updating the software in your OmiCheck unit as the new software may not work with an old version key. The OmiCheck is delivered with a range of Manufacturer Specific Applications already installed, although some may not be turned on. To turn on an application, a "key" is required from Omitec. When the application pack is purchased, the purchaser will receive instructions for the application and information on how the application may be enabled along with harnesses that may be required for the manufacturer range. To enter the security key scroll up in the 'Main Menu', select 'User Menu' and then 'Security', finally select 'Enter Key'.

Enter Key
When an application/upgrade is purchased, the application pack instructs the user on how to obtain the Security Key to turn on the application. The following keypad buttons are used to enter the key.
& Scrolls through the possible characters to be used in the key. Accepts the character selected and advances to the next character location. Exits the change key function without saving the key. Moves backward through the key in the event of an error.

Show Key
Displays the current key that has been programmed into the OmiCheck. This controls the applications that are available to the user. The key is an alphanumeric code of 15 or 20 characters.

Software Version
The software version of each of the applications installed is displayed. This information is likely to be required in the event of the user contacting the help desk. This menu item also informs the user what applications are installed if all have not been purchased.

20

FastCheck
FastCheck

Introduction
The FastCheck applications allow the OmiCheck to communicate with other system control modules on the vehicle, in addition to the standard emission related On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) functionality. There are currently seven applications that can be selected from the main menu. ABS Airbag Climate EPB SAS Service TPMS The ABS, Airbag and Climate applications allow you to read and clear any fault codes stored by the selected system. The 'EPB' (Electronic Parking Brake) function allows you to read and clear any fault codes stored by the selected system and in addition can be used during brake operation checks or brake pad replacement. The 'SAS' (Steering Angle Sensor) allows you to read and clear any faults codes stored by the selected system, and in addition can be used to calibrate the steering angle sensor. The Service application allows you to reset, dependent upon vehicle, the oil service interval indicator, service and inspection warning lights. The 'TPMS' (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) function can be used to re-program tyre valves on vehicles fitted with Schrader TPMS valves. Connection to the specific system is via either the vehicle's J1962 diagnostic socket or by a system specific connector. Refer to the 'Vehicle Application List' to determine the correct connection point and interface cable.

21

FastCheck
Safety Instructions
WARNING: General Safety

All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open
flame and heat sources.

Ensure the vehicle is stationary and the handbrake (parking brake) is applied
before carrying out any maintenance/diagnostic work. WARNING: Air Conditioning Safety

Servicing must only be carried out if you are familiar with both the vehicle
system and the test equipment.

Air conditioning refrigerant is a hazardous liquid and when handled incorrectly can cause serious injury. Suitable protective clothing, consisting of face protection, heat proof gloves, rubber boots and rubber apron or waterproof overalls, must be worn when carrying out operations on the air conditioning system. vehicle inspection pits or confined spaces, always recover all refrigerant from a damaged system before commencing work.

Danger of asphyxiation, refrigerant gas is heavier than air and will collect in

WARNING: Airbag Safety

All work on vehicle restraint systems should be carried out by trained

personnel. NEVER install accessories in the vicinity of driver, passenger or side airbags.

Observe component manufacturers instructions for safety, handling and

installation of components.

Airbags are classed as explosive devices and as such are subject to national
laws which must be followed. This includes storage and transportation.

ALWAYS store removed airbags in a secure area away from other hazardous
materials.

DO NOT connect or disconnect any wiring with the ignition ON. ALWAYS
turn the ignition switch to the 'OFF' position and allow at least 1 minute for the system to discharge.

NEVER expose system components to temperatures above 176F (80C). ONLY use approved diagnostic testers to diagnose faults, NEVER use
multi-meters or test lamps etc.

ALWAYS disconnect all airbags and seat belt pre-tensionless before using
a multi-meter to check the wiring.

22

FastCheck
WARNING: EPB Safety

Ensure that you are fully familiar with the braking system and it's operation
before commencing any work.

The Electronic Parking Brake Control system may be required to be

deactivated before carrying out any Maintenance/diagnostic work on the brake system. This can be done from the OmiCheck menu.

Only carry out maintenance work when the vehicle is stationary and on level
ground.

Ensure that the Electronic Parking Brake Control system is reactivated after
the maintenance work has been completed. NOTE: Omitec Group accept no responsibility for any accident or injury arising from the maintenance of the Electronic Parking Brake system.

23

FastCheck
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
IMPORTANT INFORMATION Mercedes vehicles with Sensotronic Brake Control Ensure that you are fully familiar with the braking system and it's operation before commencing any work. The Sensotronic Brake Control system must be deactivated before carrying out any maintenance/diagnostic work on the brake system. This can be done from the OmiCheck menu. Only commence work after the system has been deactivated. Upon deactivation, a warning message should appear in the instrument panel accompanied by an audible warning signal until the system is reactivated. If the warning signals do not occur, assume that the system is not fully deactivated and DO NOT commence work. Ensure that the Sensotronic Brake Control system is reactivated after the maintenance work has been completed. NOTE: The manufacturer of the scan tool accept no responsibility for any accident or injury arising from the maintenance of the Sensotronic Brake Control system.

Connection
Using the Vehicle Application List on the CD-ROM, identify the required interface cable for the vehicle system to be tested. Connect the cable to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing screws. NOTE: If the vehicle being tested is a BMW with a 20 pin connector and an OBD-II connector, you must only use the 20 pin connector. Ensure the vehicle's ignition is OFF. Connect the OmiCheck to the required vehicle connector, refer to Diagnostic Connector Locations, page 271, for further information. Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle connector. Once connected, the OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then the screen will display the date of the current software version before displaying the main menu.
MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. EOBD FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck User Menu ABS Airbag Climate EPB SAS Service TPMS

24

FastCheck
Use the and keys to select the 'ABS' application and press selection. To return to the previous menu, press the key. Turn the vehicle's ignition ON. Use the and selection. keys to select the vehicle manufacturer and press to confirm the to confirm the

Dependent upon the vehicle and application being run, you may be asked to choose the particular system fitted to the vehicle. Select the correct system using the and keys and press to confirm.
1. 2. Read DTCs Clear DTCs

Select the required menu option using the

and

keys and press

to confirm.

The OmiCheck will attempt to establish communication with the vehicle system. If communication is unsuccessful, refer to Troubleshooting, page 8.

Read DTCs
If any DTC codes are present in the system, a screen will be displayed informing you how many codes were found. This will then be replaced by the first DTC code. DTC codes are generated according to the vehicle and system manufacturer.

DTC 1 - 38 Right Low Pressure Sensor Circuit Signal High{ }

A typical DTC code The fault number is displayed first, followed by the DTC code. In this example the fault displayed is DTC number 38 - Right Low Pressure Sensor Circuit Signal High or Open Circuit. If the description text is too long to fit on the display, '[...]' appears in the bottom right corner of the screen. This indicates that the text can be scrolled using the and keys to view the rest of the description. To view the next DTC (if more than 1 was found), scroll to the end of the text and press the key. To return to the menu, scroll to the end of the text and press the key.

25

FastCheck
Clear DTCs
Diagnostic trouble codes can be cleared using the 'Clear DTCs' option. When using the option you will be prompted to turn the ignition off. Wait until prompted before switching the ignition back on. Start the engine to force the control module to run a system check. Verify that the code(s) have been cleared by selecting 'Read DTCs'. NOTE: Reading DTC(s) without first starting the engine will only confirm that the stored DTC(s) have been cleared. Faults may still be present in the system causing a DTC to be stored next time the engine is started.

BMW Vehicles
NOTE: To switch the ignition ON procedure for vehicles fitted with a start/stop, insert the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without any foot pedals depressed).

26

FastCheck
Airbag
Connection
Using the Vehicle Application List on the CD-ROM, identify the required interface cable for the vehicle system to be tested. Connect the cable to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing screws. Ensure the vehicle's ignition is OFF. Connect the OmiCheck to the required vehicle connector, refer to Diagnostic Connector Locations, page 271, for further information. Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle connector. Once connected, the OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then the screen will display the date of the current software version before displaying the main menu.
MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. EOBD FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck User Menu ABS Airbag Climate EPB SAS Service TPMS

Use the and keys to select the 'Airbag' application and press selection. To return to the previous menu, press the key.

to confirm the

Turn the vehicle's ignition ON. Use the and keys to select the vehicle manufacturer and press to confirm the selection. Dependent upon the vehicle and application being run, you may be asked to choose the particular system fitted to the vehicle. Select the correct system using the and keys and press to confirm.
1. 2. Read DTCs Clear DTCs

Select the required menu option using the

and

keys and press

to confirm.

The OmiCheck will attempt to establish communication with the vehicle system. If communication is unsuccessful, refer to Troubleshooting, page 8.

27

FastCheck
Read DTCs
If any DTC codes are present in the system, a screen will be displayed informing you how many codes were found. This will then be replaced by the first DTC code. DTC codes are generated according to the vehicle and system manufacturer. The fault number is displayed first, followed by the DTC code. If the description text is too long to fit on the display, '[...]' appears in the bottom right corner of the screen. This indicates that the text can be scrolled using the and keys to view the rest of the description. To view the next DTC (if more than 1 was found), scroll to the end of the text and press the key. To return to the menu, scroll to the end of the text and press the key.

Clear DTCs
Diagnostic trouble codes can be cleared using the 'Clear DTCs' option. When using the option you will be prompted to turn the ignition off. Wait until prompted before switching the ignition back on. Verify that the code(s) have been cleared by selecting 'Read DTCs'.

BMW Vehicles
NOTE: To switch the ignition ON procedure for vehicles fitted with a start/stop, insert the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without any foot pedals depressed). Some BMW vehicles are equipped with multiple airbag systems, one for each airbag fitted to the vehicle. Applicable Vehicles: BMW 3 series (E90/E91/E92/E93) BMW 5 series (E60/E61) BMW 6 series (E63/E64) BMW 7 series (E65) BMW Z4 (E85) If on selecting the Read DTCs or Clear DTCs and a multiple airbag system is detected, then a menu containing a list of airbag systems fitted to the vehicle will be displayed. Use the and keys to select the required system from the menu shown. Press the key to select the system required the Read DTCs or Clear DTCs will be performed. Press the key while the system menu is displayed to return back to the Read DTCs and Clear DTCs menu.

28

FastCheck
All airbag ECUs If the All airbag ECUs was selected then the Read DTCs or Clear DTCs function will be performed on ALL detected airbag systems on the vehicle.

Ford Galaxy (2006 -), Mondeo (2007-), S-Max (2006-), Transit (2006-) Crash Reset
This option is necessary on vehicles where airbags have been deployed following a crash. The routine clears the crash flag in the Body Control Module to enable normal operation after repair of the vehicle and installation of a new airbag.

Land Rover Freelander 2 (2007-) Restraints Build Mode Entry/Exit

This function can be used to place the Airbag/Restraint system in to build mode, to enable safe maintenance and repairs to be performed without risk of airbag or pretensioner detonation. When work has been completed on the system, the Airbag/ Restraints system can be taken out of build mode to enable normal operation.

Crash Reset
This option is necessary on vehicles where airbags have been deployed following a crash. The routine clears the crash flag in the Body Control Module to enable normal operation after repair of the vehicle and installation of a new airbag.

MINI vehicles
NOTE: To switch the ignition ON for vehicles fitted with a start/stop button, insert the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without any foot pedals depressed).

Renault vehicles
Select the airbag system then select either 12-pin or 16-pin according to which connector is fitted to the vehicle under test.Then follow the on screen instructions. The following functions are available for the airbag system: 1. Read DTCs: Displays all diagnostic trouble codes associated with the airbag system 2. Clear DTCs: Clears all faults codes from the airbag system. 3. Renault Arm/Disarm for Driver/Passenger Airbag: The Disarm CM (LOCK) menu option allows the driver airbag to be disabled preventing accidental deployment while working on the car. The Arm CM (UNLOCK) menu option causes the driver airbag to become active.

29

FastCheck
The Disarm Passenger (LOCK) menu option allows the passenger airbag to be disabled preventing accidental deployment while working on the car. The Arm Passenger (UNLOCK) menu option causes the passenger airbag to become active. NOTE: Not all vehicles will have a passenger airbag and some vehicles with a passenger airbag cannot be armed/disarmed using a diagnostic tool (they require a key to be inserted into the arm/disarm lock located next to the passenger airbag).

Vehicle notification methods for a locked airbag

Method 1 - Fault Code present: If the user reads airbag diagnostic codes after an airbag has been locked some models will produce an 'Airbag locked' fault code. After unlocking, this fault code will not appear, this can be confirmed by reading the diagnostic codes again. Method 2 - Airbag MIL stays ON: After an airbag has been locked the Airbag Malfunction Indicator on the dash panel display will remain on, when the airbag is unlocked the MIL will switch off. Method 3 - Airbag MIL flashes for several seconds when turning the ignition on: After an airbag has been locked the Airbag Malfunction Indicator on the dash panel display will flash for several seconds when the ignition is turned on, when the airbag is unlocked the MIL will switch off.

30

FastCheck
Climate
Connection
Using the Vehicle Application List on the CD-ROM, identify the required interface cable for the vehicle system to be tested. Connect the cable to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing screws. Ensure the vehicle's ignition is OFF. Connect the OmiCheck to the required vehicle connector, refer to Diagnostic Connector Locations, page 271, for further information. Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle connector. Once connected, the OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then the screen will display the date of the current software version before displaying the main menu.
MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. EOBD FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck User Menu ABS Airbag Climate EPB SAS Service TPMS

Use the and keys to select the 'Climate' application and press selection.To return to the previous menu, press the key. Turn the vehicle's ignition ON. Use the and selection. keys to select the vehicle manufacturer and press

to confirm the

to confirm the

Dependent upon the vehicle and application being run, you may be asked to choose the particular system fitted to the vehicle. Select the correct system using the and keys and press to confirm.
1. 2. Read DTCs Clear DTCs

Select the required menu option using the

and

keys and press

to confirm.

The OmiCheck will attempt to establish communication with the vehicle system. If communication is unsuccessful, refer to Troubleshooting, page 8.

31

FastCheck
Read DTCs
If any DTC codes are present in the system, a screen will be displayed informing you how many codes were found. This will then be replaced by the first DTC code. DTC codes are generated according to the vehicle and system manufacturer. The fault number is displayed first, followed by the DTC code. If the description text is too long to fit on the display, '[...]' appears in the bottom right corner of the screen. This indicates that the text can be scrolled using the and keys to view the rest of the description. To view the next DTC (if more than 1 was found), scroll to the end of the text and press the key. To return to the menu, scroll to the end of the text and press the key.

Clear DTCs
Diagnostic trouble codes can be cleared using the 'Clear DTCs' option. When using the option you will be prompted to turn the ignition off. Wait until prompted before switching the ignition back on. Start the engine to force the control module to run a system check. Verify that the code(s) have been cleared by selecting 'Read DTCs'. NOTE: Reading DTC(s) without first starting the engine will only confirm that the stored DTC(s) have been cleared. Faults may still be present in the system causing a DTC to be stored next time the engine is started.

BMW/MINI Vehicles
NOTE: To switch the ignition ON procedure for vehicles fitted with a start/stop, insert the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without any foot pedals depressed).

32

FastCheck
EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)
Connection
Using the Vehicle Application List, identify the required interface cable for the vehicle system to be tested. Connect the cable to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing screws. Ensure the vehicle's ignition is OFF. Connect the OmiCheck to the required vehicle connector, refer to Diagnostic Connector Locations, page 271, for further information. Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle connector. Once connected, the OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then the screen will display the date of the current software version before displaying the main menu.
MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. EOBD FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck User Menu ABS Airbag Climate EPB SAS Service TPMS

Use the and keys to select the 'EPB' application and press selection.To return to the previous menu, press the key. Turn the vehicle's ignition ON. Use the and selection. keys to select the vehicle manufacturer and press

to confirm the

to confirm the

33

FastCheck
Dependent upon the vehicle manufacturer and model different menu options will then be available. Function such as read and Clear DTCs will be available along with service functions.

BMW vehicles
NOTE: To switch the ignition ON for vehicles fitted with a start/stop button, insert the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without any foot pedals depressed).

BMW 7 Series (E65)

Parking Brake Bedding-in If the brake shoes of the Duo Servo Brake are replaced then the bedding process must be performed to ensure correct operation of the system. The procedure may be performed on a roller test rig or on a road test drive. Automatic hold The Automatic hold function applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary and applies the brakes and parking brake when the engine is switched off. This function can be disabled / enabled. Assembly mode Unintentional operation of the parking brake button before the Bowden cables have engaged in the wheel carrier can lead to assembly problems. Assembly mode suppresses the activation of the parking brake. Positioning travel check If excessive travel has been detected then a warning is displayed and fault stored. This procedure is used to determine the cause of the problem detected by the system.

BMW X5 (E70) / X6 (E71)

Workshop mode While in workshop mode the parking brake is placed into the opened position and the system is disabled. Parking Brake Bedding-in If the brake shoes of the Duo Servo Brake are replaced then the bedding process must be performed to ensure correct operation of the system. The procedure may be performed on a roller test rig or on a road test drive.

34

FastCheck
Ford Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) System
Two Electronic Parking Brake systems are currently supported on the service tool:

Ford Focus C-Max 2003 - present:

There are two test functions available under the calibration section of the EPB menu these are described below.

Electronic Parking Brake Calibration Function Test

Checks the Electronic Parking Brake is working correctly. This test should be performed after work has been completed on the Electronic Parking Brake or vehicles braking system. The test removes any air gap from the brake pads and checks the EPB pressure. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The brake fluid level is correct The operator will be asked to perform a number of actions before applying the EPB. The OmiCheck reads and displays the EPB pressure. With the EPB applied the EPB pressure should be approximately 1100 Newtons. The operator will then be asked to unlock/release the EPB. The OmiCheck reads and displays the EPB pressure. With the EPB released the EPB pressure should be 0 Newton. If either of the above tests fail (pressure reading not correct) the EPB assembly should be removed and re-assembled.

Electronic Parking Brake Emergency Release Calibration

Checks the Electronic Parking Brake emergency release is working correctly. This test should be performed after work has been completed on the Electronic Parking Brake or vehicles braking system. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The brake fluid level is correct

35

FastCheck
The operator will be asked to perform a number of actions before applying the EPB. The OmiCheck reads and displays the EPB pressure. With the EPB applied the EPB pressure should be approximately 1100 Newtons. The operator will then be prompted to pull manually on the emergency release. The OmiCheck reads and displays the EPB pressure. With the emergency release activated the EPB pressure should be 0 Newton and the vehicle should be able to move freely. If either of the above tests fail then the EPB assembly should be inspected and repaired as described by the manufacturers instructions.

Ford Galaxy (2006-), Mondeo (2007-), S-Max (2006-):

There are three options in the PBM/EPB function menu which can be used to access various functions:

Service Brakes
There are three functions available under the Service Brakes menu option:

Enter Maintenance Mode

This function is used to put the system into a state that enables work to be carried out by the technician. The Control Module puts the calipers into a state where normal operation is inhibited and the callipers can not be closed by any means.This function must be used if replacement of the brakes, discs or brake pads is to be carried out. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks This function takes 30 seconds to complete. NOTE: After this function has been performed the EPB calipers can not be closed and are inhibited until exit maintenance mode is run. Cycling the ignition, disconnecting the battery or diagnostics tester does not exit maintenance mode. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

Exit Maintenance Mode

This function is used to put the system back into an operational state after work has been carried out by the technician. Calipers are closed to the applied position, and normal operation is available again.

36

FastCheck
Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks This function takes 35 seconds to complete. This function also automatically performs an 'Assembly Check', which carries out internal tests on the Parking Brake system and reports the status (see below). Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

Assembly Check
This function is used to check the operation of the parking brake system after any work has been completed on the system. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks This function takes 25 seconds to complete. NOTE: This test is automatically run as part of the 'Exit Maintenance Mode' function. It is not necessary to perform this function if the 'Exit Maintenance Mode' function reported no problems NOTE: This function can not be performed while the parking brake system is in maintenance mode. It should only be performed when the system is in normal operating mode. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

Actuators
The following is available under the Actuators menu option:

Static Apply
This function is used to test the operation of the actuators which operate the calipers. This function closes the actuators to the nominal parking brake apply position.

37

FastCheck
Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks It should be used if it is suspected that there is a fault with the Control Module, wiring, or the actuators (if the parking brake will not engage/disengage when manually operated). NOTE: This function can not be performed while the parking brake system is in maintenance mode. It should only be performed when the system is in normal operating mode.

Configuration
There are two functions available under the Configuration menu option: Inclination Sensor Calibration This function is used to reset the stored zero value of the inclination sensor. It should be used when a new Parking Brake module has been fitted or a new Inclination sensor has been fitted. Pre-Test conditions: The operator must NOT be inside the vehicle The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground Ensure the vehicle is not subject to any vibration (closing boot, bonnet, etc) The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks NOTE: This function cannot be performed while the parking brake system is in maintenance mode. It should be performed when the system is in normal operating mode. Clear Stored Clutch Engagement Point This function is used to reset the stored value of the clutch engagement point. It should be used when a new Parking Brake module has been fitted or a new clutch has been fitted. This function is only applicable to vehicles with manual transmission.

38

FastCheck
Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground When this function has been performed successfully the Parking Brake module will re-learn a new clutch engagement point when the vehicle is next driven. NOTE: This function cannot be performed while the parking brake system is in maintenance mode. It should be performed when the system is in normal operating mode. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

Notes on Use of Functions

The four functions are designed to be used in several different situations. Here are a few situations which may occur and the correct use of the functions to rectify the situation: Rear Brake Pad, Brake Disc or Caliper Replacement: 1. If the vehicle requires any of the above components to be replaced the 'Enter Maintenance Mode' function should be performed. 2. The system will be disabled to allow maintenance work to be carried out easily and safely. 3. After the work has been carried out the 'Exit Maintenance Mode' function should be performed. Inclination Sensor Replacement: 1. After the new sensor has been installed perform the Inclination Sensor Calibration function. Clutch Replacement (manual transmission): 1. After a new clutch has been installed perform the Clear Clutch Engagement Point function. 2. The vehicle will then learn the new clutch engagement point as the vehicle is driven. Parking Brake Module Replacement: 1. After the Parking Brake Module has been replaced perform the Inclination Sensor Calibration function. 2. If the vehicle has manual transmission perform the Clear Clutch Engagement Point function. 3. The vehicle will then learn the new clutch engagement point as the vehicle is driven.

39

FastCheck
Any other EPB system component has been replaced: 1. DTCs should be read and cleared. 2. The 'Assembly Check' function should be performed to check the operation of the parking brake system. 3. If the 'Assembly Check' function fails, DTCs should be read again and the problem investigated. The Parking Brake will not engage when manually operated via the button: 1. Ensure that the system is NOT in 'Maintenance Mode'. If it is, then perform the 'Exit Maintenance Mode' function. 2. Read DTCs, there may be a DTC stored which will indicate the area of the fault. 3. Clear DTCs, there may be an intermittent fault on the system which needs to be cleared. 4. Perform the 'Static Apply' function. This will send a command directly to the Control Module which will then close the actuators to the nominal 'engaged' position. 5. Check the switch/button. 6. Check the actuators themselves or the wiring from the Control Module to the actuators.

Land Rover - Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) System Discovery III (L319) (2005 - 2009), Range Rover Sport (L320) (2005 2009), Range Rover (L322) (2006 - 2009):
There are four functions available under the PBM/EPB Service Brakes menu:

Unjam Electronic Parking Brake

This procedure should be used if one of the Parking Brake cables becomes detached or breaks whilst the vehicle is being driven. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The engine must be running and at idle speed After performing the procedure it is necessary for the technician to carry out checks on the condition of the rear brake shoes and drums. If both are OK the technician should then refer to the Land Rover technical information. NOTE: Part of this procedure is to place the Parking brake into Mounting Position; in order for the checks of the rear brake shoes and drums to be carried out. When the vehicle is in the 'Mounting Position' a red flashing light will appear on the instrument cluster. This indicates that the parking brake actuator is in the 'Mounting Position'. It does not indicate a vehicle fault.

40

FastCheck
Mounting Position
The park brake must be driven to the Mounting Position if any of the following procedures are to be performed: Parking Brake Shoes - Removal/Installation. Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment. This procedure must be carried out if, new parking brake shoes are fitted, new rear brake discs are fitted or if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50 miles. Or if one of the brake cables has broken or become detached during the vehicle being driven (in this case the Park brake is driven to the Mounting Position as part of the Park Brake Unjam procedure above). Changing of Parking Brake Cables (RH and LH). If the parking brake system has completed less than 50,000 cycles it is permissible to replace the parking brake cables. If over 50,000 cycles have been completed, then the cables can only replaced as part of the parking brake actuator and cable assembly. If a cable breaks or becomes detached whilst the vehicle is being driven, the 'parking brake unjam procedure' may be required. Parking Brake Actuator - Removal/Installation The purpose is to allow the brake cables to be connected or disconnected to the brakes. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary. The ignition must be on (position II). An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply. NOTE: To remove the parking brake from Mounting Position; switch the parking brake switch on and off twice. NOTE: When the vehicle is in the 'Mounting Position' a red flashing light will appear on the instrument cluster. This indicates that the parking brake actuator is in the 'Mounting Position'. It does not indicate a vehicle fault. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

41

FastCheck
Latching Position
This procedure may be necessary if the Parking Brake emergency release has been activated, in order to re-latch the Parking brake. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary. The ignition must be on (position II). An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

Longitudinal Accelerometer Calibration

This procedure may be necessary if the Longitudinal Accelerometer has been replaced. Pre-Test conditions: The ignition must be on (position II). An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply. Ensure the vehicle is placed on a level surface and that it remains stationary throughout the whole procedure. Ensure the vehicle is stationary (0 km/h) on a level surface & no apply or release command has been received. Make sure the parking brake module is correctly secured to the vehicle and that the parking brake is applied. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

MANUAL FUNCTIONS
The following can be performed manually without the OmiCheck:

Disable Parking Brake for Rear Brake Disc Change

This procedure is necessary before carrying out work on the rear brake discs. When performed correctly the brake callipers are wound back by the control module: Manual Routine: Turn the ignition key to position II. Apply, and hold, the footbrake, Apply, and hold, the parking brake switch to the RELEASE position.

42

FastCheck
Turn the ignition key to position 0 and remove the key. Release the footbrake. Release the parking brake switch. Remove fuse number 8 from the BJB (to isolate the parking brake electrical circuit). This will ensure safe working conditions and eradicate the threat of the parking brake accidentally coming on while the technician is working on it. To Re-enable Normal Operation: Re-install fuse number 8 into the BJB (to re-enable the parking brake electrical circuit).

Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-in Procedure

This procedure must be carried out if, new parking brake shoes are fitted, new rear brake discs are fitted or if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50 miles: Manual Routine: Start and run the engine. Apply the footbrake 3 times within 10 seconds and hold applied after the 3rd application. Apply the electronic parking brake switch 4 times, followed by 3 release applications within 10 seconds. Once the Service Bedding-in procedure mode has been entered, the electronic parking brake linings can be bedded-in by conducting 10 repeated stops from 30 - 35 km/h (19 - 22 mph), followed by a 500 metre (547 yard) interval between each stop to allow the brakes to cool, using the electronic parking brake control switch. The electronic parking brake force will be increased up to the dynamic maximum so long as the switch is held in the applied position. If the switch is released to either the NEUTRAL or OFF positions, the electronic parking brake will be released, The electronic parking brake MUST be allowed to cool between applications, either by driving at 19 mph (30 km/h) for 500 metres (547 yards) or remaining stationary for 1 minute between each application. NOTE: The electronic parking brake 'Service Bedding-in Procedure mode' will be active for the remainder of the ignition cycle, or until the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h). If the procedure needs to be re-entered, the entry actions must be repeated.

43

FastCheck
Renault - Handbrake
There are test functions available under the circuit tests section of the handbrake menu these are described below.

Release Brakes
Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The engine must not be running The test requests the handbrake is released. The brakes will be released during this test once this test has been completed then the apply brakes function should be performed.

Apply Brakes
Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The engine must not be running The test requests the handbrake is applied. The brakes will be applied during this test.

VAG Electro-mechanic Parking Brake System

VW/Audi Electro-mechanic Parking Brake (EPB) system integrates two electro-mechanical actuators (Right and Left Parking Brake Motors) into the rear disc brake callipers. The EPB system replaces the traditional handbrake system. When the vehicle is stationary or when the EPB/Auto hold button is pressed the EPB control module activates the parking bake motors on the rear wheels holding the vehicle in place. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The brake fluid level is correct The Parking brake is off NOTE: During the process of releasing and resetting the brake pistons the ECM may store DTCs in the EPB or ABS control modules. After completing the calibration procedure the EPB and ABS DTC memory must be cleared.

44

FastCheck
EPB for Audi A4/A5/A6 & VW Passat/Tiguan
Select the required option from the Maintenance menu either Replace Pads or Service Brakes then follow described sequence.

Brake Pad Replacement/Service Sequence

The EPB system must be deactivated and completely released and the ignition must be on. NOTE: The sequence must be performed in the correct order else the braking system maybe left in a non-operational state.

Release Brakes
Select the Release Brakes option from the menu. The brake pistons will now be moved to their released position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the release brakes now complete message before continuing.

Replace/Service the Brake Pads

The brake pads can now be replaced or serviced following the manufacturers instructions.

Close Brakes
Select the Close Brakes option from the menu. The brake pistons will now be moved to their reset position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the close brakes now complete message before continuing.

Calibrate Brakes
Select the Calibrate Brakes option from the menu. The brake pistons will now be moved in and out to calibrate their position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the calibrate brakes now complete message before continuing.

EPB for Audi A8

Select the required option from the Maintenance menu either Replace Pads or Service Brakes then follow the required sequence.

Brake Pad Replacement Sequence (Only)

The EPB system must be deactivated and completely released and the ignition must be on then follow the sequence described below. NOTE: The sequence must be performed in the correct order otherwise the braking system maybe left in a non-operational state.

45

FastCheck
Replace Pads
Select the Replace Pads option from the Replace Pads menu. The brake pistons will now be moved to their released position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the release brakes now open for pad change message before continuing.

Replace the Brake Pads

The brake pads can now be replaced following the manufacturers instructions.

Pad Thickness
The brake pad thickness must be now be entered by selecting Pad Thickness from the Replace Pads menu. The current value is displayed on screen. Press the key to change value then enter the new value between 3-14mm. Press the key to test the new value a message will be displayed. Press the key to move to the store new value screen. Now press the key again to store the new value to the control module.

Close Brakes
Select the Close Brakes option from the Replace Pads menu. The brake pistons will now be moved to their reset position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the close brakes now complete message before continuing.

Calibrate Brakes
Select the Calibrate Brakes option from the Replace Pads menu. The brake pistons will now be moved in and out to calibrate their position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the calibrate brakes now complete massage before continuing.

Brakes Service Sequence (Only)

The EPB system must be deactivated and completely released and the ignition must be on then follow the sequence described below. NOTE: The sequence must be performed in the correct order else the braking system maybe left in a non-operational state.

Release Brakes
Select the Release Brakes option from the Service Brakes menu. The brake pistons will now be moved to their released position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the release brakes now complete message before continuing.

Service the Brakes

The brakes can now be serviced following the manufacturers instructions.

46

FastCheck
Close Brakes
Select the Close Brakes option from the Service Brakes menu. The brake pistons will now be moved to their reset position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the close brakes now complete message before continuing.

Calibrate Brakes
Select the Calibrate Brakes option from the Service Brakes menu. The brake pistons will now be moved in and out to calibrate their position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the calibrate brakes now complete massage before continuing.

Volvo - Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) System Volvo S80 (2007 -), V70 (2008 -), XC60 (2009-), XC70 (2008 -)
There are three options in the PBM/EPB function menu which can be used to access various functions: There are three functions available under the Service Brakes menu option:

Enter Service Mode

This function is used to put the system into a state that enables work to be carried out by the technician. The Control Module puts the callipers into a state where normal operation is inhibited and the callipers cannot be closed by any means. This function must be used if replacement of the brakes, discs or brake pads is carried out. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks. This function takes 30 seconds to complete. NOTE: After this function has been performed the EPB callipers cannot be closed and are inhibited until exit service mode is run. Cycling the ignition, disconnecting the battery or diagnostics tester does not exit maintenance mode. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

47

FastCheck
Exit Service Mode
This function is used to put the system back into an operational state after work has been carried out by the technician. Callipers are closed to the applied position, and normal operation is available again. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks. This function takes 10 seconds to complete. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

Installation Check
This function is used to check the operation of the parking brake system after any work has been completed on the system. Pre-Test conditions: The vehicle must be stationary The vehicle must be on level ground The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks. Three internal tests are performed, each will report the status. If any of these tests fail to perform the Read DTCs function to detect the possible fault with the system. This function takes 25 seconds to complete. NOTE: This function cannot be performed while the parking brake system is in service mode. It should only be performed when the system is in normal operating mode. Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct order.

48

FastCheck
SAS (Steering Angle Sensor)
Connection
Using the Vehicle Application List on the CD-ROM, identify the required interface cable for the vehicle system to be tested. Connect the cable to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing screws. NOTE: If the vehicle being tested is a BMW with a 20 pin connector and an OBD-II connector, you must only use the 20 pin connector. Ensure the vehicles ignition is OFF. Connect the OmiCheck to the required vehicle connector, refer to Diagnostic Connector Locations, page 271, for further information. Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle connector. Once connected, the OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then the screen will display the date of the current software version before displaying the main menu.
MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. EOBD FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck User Menu ABS Airbag Climate EPB SAS Service TPMS

Use the and keys to select the 'SAS' application and press selection. To return to the previous menu, press the key. Turn the vehicle's ignition ON. Use the and selection. keys to select the vehicle manufacturer and press

to confirm the

to confirm the

Dependent upon the vehicle manufacturer and application being run, you may be asked to choose the particular system fitted to the vehicle. Select the correct system using the and keys and press to confirm.
1. 2. 3. Read DTCs Clear DTCs SAS Calibration

Select the required menu option using the

and

keys and press

to confirm.

49

FastCheck
The OmiCheck will attempt to establish communication with the vehicle system. If communication is unsuccessful, refer to Troubleshooting, page 8.

Read DTCs
If any DTC codes are present in the system, a screen will be displayed informing you how many codes were found. This will then be replaced by the first DTC code. DTC codes are generated according to the vehicle and system manufacturer.

DTC 1 - 38 Right Low Pressure Sensor Circuit Signal High{ }

A typical DTC code The fault number is displayed first, followed by the DTC code. In this example the fault displayed is DTC number 38 - Right Low Pressure Sensor Circuit Signal High or Open Circuit. If the description text is too long to fit on the display, '[...]' appears in the bottom right corner of the screen. This indicates that the text can be scrolled using the and keys to view the rest of the description. To view the next DTC (if more than 1 was found), scroll to the end of the text and press the key. To return to the menu, scroll to the end of the text and press the key.

Clear DTCs
Diagnostic trouble codes can be cleared using the 'Clear DTCs' option. When using the option you will be prompted to turn the ignition off. Wait until prompted before switching the ignition back on. Start the engine to force the control module to run a system check. Verify that the code(s) have been cleared by selecting 'Read DTCs'. NOTE: Reading DTC(s) without first starting the engine will only confirm that the stored DTC(s) have been cleared. Faults may still be present in the system causing a DTC to be stored next time the engine is started.

50

FastCheck
SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) Calibration
The steering angle sensor can be calibrated using the SAS Calibration option. The on screen instructions must be performed to ensure the calibration process is correctly completed. NOTE: The steering angle sensor should be calibrated after performing wheel alignment or suspension adjustments.

Alfa Romeo/Fiat/Lancia vehicles Steering angle sensor calibration

On some vehicles there may be a steering angle sensor calibration routine available on both the ABS/TC/ESP control module and the Power Steering control module. If this is the case the technician should always perform the routine via the Power Steering control module. It will only be necessary to perform a steering angle sensor calibration via the ABS/TC/ESP module on these vehicles if the sensor itself or/and the ABS/TC/ESP control module have been replaced.

Longitudinal acceleration sensor calibration

This routine is necessary in the following situations: 1. The Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor has been replaced. 2. The ABS/TC/ESP control module has been replaced. 3. The ESP system is not behaving as it should. Resetting of this sensor can sometimes cure strange ESP behaviour.

BMW/MINI Vehicles
NOTE: Procedure to switch the ignition ON for vehicles fitted with a start/stop, insert the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without any foot pedals depressed).

Ford vehicles Steering angle sensor calibration

Ka II (2008 -): On these vehicles there may be a steering angle sensor calibration routine available on both the ABS/TC/ESP control module and the Power Steering control module. If this is the case the technician should always perform the routine via the Power Steering control module. It will only be necessary to perform a steering angle sensor calibration via the ABS/TC/ESP module on these vehicles if the sensor itself or/and the ABS/TC/ESP control module have been replaced.

51

FastCheck
Fiesta (2008 -), Fusion/B-Max (2008 -): On these vehicles steering angle sensor calibration is performed via the Power Steering control module only. Ford Galaxy (2006 -), Mondeo (2007 -), S-Max (2006 -), Transit (2006 -): On these vehicles steering angle sensor calibration is performed via the ABS/TC/ESP control module only. Longitudinal acceleration sensor calibration: This routine is necessary in the following situations: 1. The Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor has been replaced. 2. The ABS/TC/ESP control module has been replaced. 3. The ESP system is not behaving as it should. Resetting of this sensor can sometimes cure strange ESP behaviour.

Land Rover vehicles Longitudinal acceleration sensor calibration:

This routine is necessary in the following situations: 1. The Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor has been replaced. 2. The ABS/TC/ESP control module has been replaced. 3. The ESP system is not behaving as it should. Resetting of this sensor can sometimes cure strange ESP behaviour.

52

FastCheck
Service
Connection
Using the Vehicle Application List on the CD-ROM, identify the required interface cable for the vehicle system to be tested. Connect the cable to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing screws. NOTE: If the vehicle being tested is a BMW fitted with both a 20 pin connector and an OBD-II connector, you must only use the 20 pin connector. NOTE: If the vehicle being tested is a Mercedes fitted with both a 38 pin connector and an OBD-II connector, you must only use the 38 pin connector. Ensure the vehicle's ignition is OFF. Connect the OmiCheck to the required vehicle connector, refer to Diagnostic Connector Locations, page 271, for further information. Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle connector. Once connected, the OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then the screen will display the date of the current software version before displaying the main menu.
MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. EOBD FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck FastCheck User Menu ABS Airbag Climate EPB SAS Service TPMS

Use the and keys to select the 'Service' application and press selection. To return to the previous menu, press the key. Turn the vehicle's ignition ON. Use the and selection. keys to select the vehicle manufacturer and press

to confirm the

to confirm the

Dependent upon the vehicle manufacturer and model different menu options will then be available.

Alfa Romeo/Fiat/Lancia vehicles

There are potentially three options in the Service menu for these manufacturers:

53

FastCheck
Service Interval
This option resets the conventional service interval indicator. This function is to be used AFTER a full service (18000 miles for petrol or 21000 miles for diesel) has been completed on the vehicle.

Oil Change Reset

This option is currently only applicable to the new Fiat Ducato van (Ducato III MY2006 onwards). This function is to be used AFTER an Oil Change has been completed on the vehicle.

Oil Degradation Counter Reset

This option is necessary on vehicles which have Diesel Particulate Filters (DPF) fitted. This is NOT necessary on vehicles with petrol or LPG engines or diesel engines if DPF is not fitted. When selected the OmiCheck will interrogate the vehicle to determine the applicability of the function. This function allows the resetting of the Oil Degradation Counter and viewing of the Oil Degradation parameters (number of resets, Oil Degradation Counter %, km until next reset required, odometer at last reset). The counter should only be reset AFTER the Oil has been changed. When reset the Counter will be reset to 100%, the number of resets will increase by 1.

Alfa Romeo Vehicles Mannesman Dashboard (147 and GT - UK only)

For Alfa Romeo vehicles with the Mannesman Dashboard (147 and GT) there is a problem with the Dashboard which causes the Number of miles to Service value to be set to zero when a Service Reset is performed using the OmiCheck. When the Service Reset is performed the Dashboard stores the current mileage (or kilometre) value, read from the Odometer, in order to calculate when the next service is required. However, when the Odometer is shown in miles the calculation for the distance to the next service fails. This results in distance to the next service being displayed as zero and the Service Reset fails to be completed. To reset the Service Interval the following procedure must be performed: 1. Switch the Ignition ON. 2. Press the [MODE] button on the dashboard to enter the dashboard functions menu. 3. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the UNITS option and press [MODE] to select. 4. Use the [MODE], [+] and [-] buttons to set the units to Kilometres. All other settings should be left unchanged. 5. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the END MENU option

54

FastCheck
and press [MODE] to exit the functions menu. 6. Plug the OmiCheck into the Diagnostic Socket and perform a Service Reset by selecting Service, Alfa Romeo, Mannesman then Service Reset. 7. Disconnect the OmiCheck, leaving the ignition on. 8. Press the [MODE] button on the dashboard to enter the dashboard functions menu. 9. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the UNITS option and press [MODE] to select. 10. Use the [MODE], [+] and [-] buttons to set the units back to Miles. All other settings should be left unchanged. 11. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the SERVICE option and press [MODE] to select. 12. Number of Miles to Service should now read approximately 12500 miles. 13. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the END MENU option and press [MODE] to exit the functions menu. 14. Switch Ignition OFF. This procedure is necessary to ensure that the value read from the Odometer by the dashboard, when a Service Reset is performed by the OmiCheck, is in Kilometres. The Dashboard can then calculate the Number of Miles to Service correctly. On the European Continent this procedure is not necessary as all dashboards are in Kilometres.

BMW Vehicles
NOTE: To switch the ignition ON procedure for vehicles fitted with a start/stop, insert the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without any foot pedals depressed). Manufacturer
BMW

Option 1
CBS Digital Reset

Option 2
Service Options Oil Reset Distance Reset Time Reset Oil Inspection Service

Analogue Reset

Use the and keys to select the required menu option and press selection. To return to a previous menu, press the key.

to confirm the

The screen will display the message BMW Reset to confirm the reset process was completed successfully.

55

FastCheck
Select Condition Based Service (CBS):
NOTE: All required work must be carried out before service indicators are reset. Failure to do so may result in incorrect service values and cause DTCs to be stored by the relevant control module. NOTE: The DSC module will not recognise the replacement of the brake pad wear sensor before a terminal change has taken place. As such the DSC module will not allow reset of the brake pad service items. It is recommended that the brake pads are replaced with genuine BMW parts. The DSC module may not recognise a terminal change if using non-genuine brake pads. Select Condition Based Service (CBS) for vehicles only fitted with a J1962 16 pin connector and support Condition Based Service (CBS). Applicable vehicles: BMW 1 series (E81/E87) BMW 3 series (E90/E91/E92/E93) BMW 5 series (E60/E61) BMW 6 series (E63/E64) BMW 7 series (E65) BMW X5 (E70) BMW X6 (E71) MINI (R55/R56/R57) NOTE: Refer to the Vehicle Application List to determine the correct cable. Condition Based Service (CBS) is a system in which the vehicle calculates and monitors the status of serviced components and fluid levels as well as time and mileage based services.

56

FastCheck
The following table displays possible service options together with the control module used to reset each option. Service Option
Engine oil Particulate filter Diesel additive Engine (DDE) Front brake pads Rear brake pads Micro filter Brake fluid Coolant Spark plugs Vehicle check Statutory vehicle inspection Statutory exhaust emission inspection

Control Module
Engine (DME/DDE) Engine (DDE) Engine (DDE) Dynamic stability control (DSC) Dynamic stability control (DSC) Climate control (IHKA) Instrument cluster (INSTR) Instrument cluster (INSTR) Instrument cluster (INSTR) Instrument cluster (INSTR) Instrument cluster (INSTR) Instrument cluster (INSTR)

The OmiCheck will automatically identify all control modules required during the reset process. If an unknown control module is found or communications cannot be established, the operator is prompted to either to continue or abort. NOTE: If the process is continued service options applicable to the unknown control module will not be available (see service option table). The current date and time information will be displayed by the OmiCheck. Press the key if the information is correct and continue or press key to correct the information. NOTE: If date and time used during the reset process is incorrect, this will result in incorrect service intervals. To change the date and time: Use the / \. Use the Use the and keys to change the value of the selected information indicated by

key to change the selected date/time field. key to complete the information entry. key

The screen will display a final confirmation of the new data entered. Press the to program the new information to the vehicle.

Pressing the key at any point during the date and time change to will return to the initial date and time confirmation screen. No information will have been changed. The service options available on the vehicle are displayed as a list. Each option is displayed with the service data: The percentage reset value.

57

FastCheck
The estimated distance too or the next service date. The service counter. NOTE: The vehicle inspection and exhaust emission inspection only display the date of the next service. The service option list is displayed in priority order, with the most urgent first. To reset an option scroll to the required option using the and keys. The current option will be indicated by the . Press the key to confirm the selection. Two possible options maybe displayed on the lower half of the display:Reset option Correct option Use the Use the Use the and keys to select the required menu option key to confirm the selection. key to cancel the selection and return to the service option list.

Reset Option: The Reset option is used to set the selected service options reset value to 100%. The estimated distance or date of next service and the service counter are updated. The vehicle inspection and exhaust emission inspection service options are statutory inspections that store the date of the next inspection. Upon selecting either of these options the OmiCheck will display the screen to change the next service date. Upon selecting either of these options the OmiCheck will display the screen to change the next service date. Use the > or <. Use the Use the Use the and keys to change the value of the selected information indicated by

key to change the selected field. key to complete and store the information. key to cancel the reset and return to the service option list.

58

FastCheck
Correct Option:
The Correct option is used to correct a service option which has been reset in error. NOTE: Reset correction is only available for service options with service counter not zero, and is not available for vehicle and exhaust emission inspections. The original service option values are lost during reset. Use the Use the and keys to change the reset value.

key to complete the information entry.

A final confirmation of the new data entered is displayed. Press the key to store the new information. To cancel the correction and return to the service option list press the key. NOTE: The maximum reset value will be the current value of the selected service option. The service counter will be decremented by 1.

Digital Reset:
Select Digital Reset for vehicles only fitted with a J1962 16 pin connector and do not support Condition Based Service (CBS). The OmiCheck will display a message to confirm the reset process was successful. Applicable vehicles: BMW 3 Series (E46) BMW 5 Series (E39) BMW 7 Series (E38) BMW X3 (E83) BMW X5 (E53) BMW Z4 (E85) NOTE: A manual procedure for service reset is possible for some Digital Reset applicable vehicles. Refer to Manual Service Reset section for instructions.

Analogue Reset:
Select Analogue Reset for vehicles fitted with a 20 pin round diagnostic connector within the engine bay. The OmiCheck will display the message Reset complete to confirm the reset process was completed. NOTE: The OmiCheck indicates the completion of the process only. Visual confirmation via the Service Interval Indicator (SIA) located on the vehicles dash panel is required.

59

FastCheck
Annual Distance:
The average annual distance travelled is required for the calculation of various Condition Based Service (CBS) functions. The annual distance is based on the distance travelled after approximately six to eight weeks from being reset. It is advised to reset the annual distance after any changes in the driving pattern of the vehicle. NOTE: Incorrect annual distance will affect the CBS intervals. The value will be set to a default (approximately 30,000 km / 18,640 miles) until the new value has been calculated. Applicable vehicles: BMW 1 series (E81/E87) BMW 3 series (E90/E91/E92/E93) BMW 5 series (E60/E61) BMW 6 series (E63/E64) BMW 7 series (E65) BMW X5 (E70) BMW X6 (E71)

Battery Change:
After fitting a new battery, the battery change function should be run. The battery change function registers the replacement of a battery with the power management system. Failure to do so may cause the power management system to operate incorrectly. The battery change application determines the required battery capacity and type from the Car Access System (CAS) module. The replacement battery must be same capacity and type as displayed. NOTE: Certain vehicles require the use of an Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) battery. Applicable vehicles: BMW 1 series (E81/E87) BMW 3 series (E90/E91/E92/E93) BMW 5 series (E60/E61) BMW 6 series (E63/E64) BMW 7 series (E65) BMW X5 (E70) BMW X6 (E71)

60

FastCheck
Ford vehicles Oil Degradation Counter Reset
This option is necessary on vehicles which have Diesel Particulate Filters (DPF) fitted. This is not necessary on vehicles with petrol or LPG engines or diesel engines if DPF is not fitted. The counter should only be reset AFTER the oil has been changed.

GM Vehicles Service Interval Reset

CAN Vehicles - (Astra-H, Corsa-D, Signum, Vectra-C and Zafira-B) This function should be used after a vehicle has been serviced. The vehicle is programmed with the number of miles and days until the next service and the Service Indicator light is turned off. The Service Indicator will come on again when either the number of programmed miles is reached or the number of programmed days is reached, whichever occurs first. The reset is started by selecting the 'Service option. To return to a previous menu, press the key.

The OmiCheck will communicate with the Instrument pack to determine the vehicle model. If the vehicle model is unknown the operator must manually select the vehicle. NOTE: Vehicle must NOT be moving during this procedure and all doors must be closed. The OmiCheck will check the vehicle speed to ensure that the vehicle is not moving before starting the procedure. Security Code To perform the reset the operator must enter a 4-digit security code into the OmiCheck. This code will be programmed into the vehicle to allow a Reset to be performed. The 4-digit security code is found in the owners handbook on a card with the other important codes and numbers for the vehicle (such as the VIN number and Radio code etc.).

61

FastCheck
Corsa D The number of miles until the next service can be selected by the user, 9000 miles or 18000 miles can be selected. The number of days until the next service is always set at 364 days (1 year). Astra-H / Zafira-B The number of miles until the next service and number of days until the next service are calculated by the OmiCheck depending on the operators selections of the following: 1. Country - The miles and days until next service are set to values pre-determined by GM, depending on the Country the vehicle is being used in. The operator must first select the Continent and then the Country. For core European Countries (UK, Ireland, France, Belgium, Germany, Spain, Italy, Portugal, Holland, Austria etc.) select Other European Countries. 2. ECO Service, ECO Service Flex - For most core European countries the Operator can set the vehicle to either ECO Service (the standard GM service plan which used standard GM values for miles and days until next service) or ECO Service Flex (the values for miles and days until next service are dynamically set by the vehicles onboard computers, which monitor how the vehicle is being driven and set the Service Intervals accordingly). For ECO Service Flex Petrol vehicles the OmiCheck will program the vehicle with the maximum number of miles allowed by the Flex system (22000 miles) and the maximum number of days allowed (728, or 2 years). For ECO Service Flex Diesel vehicles the OmiCheck will program the vehicle with the maximum number of miles allowed by the Flex system (31000 miles) and the maximum number of days allowed (728, or 2 years). These are default values which ensure that the Service Indicator will come on in either 22000 or 31000 miles or 2 years, whichever occurs first, if the ECO Service Flex system fails for any reason. Vectra-C / Signum Only a straight reset is available on these vehicles. The programmed Service Interval values of miles and days until the next service cannot be altered. NOTE: The Engine Oil used on these vehicles is Long-life Oil. When the Engine Oil is changed the Technician must use the Long-life Oil reset option on the OmiCheck (see below) to reset the Engine Control Module. The Technician must then select Service again to restart the Service Interval Reset. CAUTION: It is important to depress, and release, the brake pedal when prompted by the OmiCheck during the Reset procedure. If this is not done correctly the Reset will not be successful.

62

FastCheck
Pre-CAN vehicles
This function should be used after a vehicle has been serviced. The vehicle is programmed with the number of miles and days (which ever one occurs first) until the next service and the Service Indicator light is turned off. The reset is started by selecting the 'Service option. To return to a previous menu, press the key.

Please ensure that the vehicle is stationary and check that all the vehicle's doors are closed. Press on the OmiCheck to reset the Service Interval.

If successful the OmiCheck will display 'Service Reset Passed'.

Long-Life Oil Reset CAN Vehicles - (Vectra-C and Signum)

NOTE: The engine must NOT be running when performing this procedure. This function must be used when an Engine Oil Change has been performed on the vehicle. The Long-Life Oil Reset is started by selecting the Long-Life Oil option. The Technician must then select the cable to be used. The OmiCheck will check the Engine Control Module to ensure that the function is supported for the current engine. This function is not supported and not necessary on Astra-H, Corsa-D or Zafira-B. The OmiCheck will check the Engine Speed to ensure that the engine is NOT running then read the current value of Remaining Oil Life from the Engine Control Module and display. If the value is less than 15% the Oil MUST be changed and a reset performed. The OmiCheck will then perform the Reset. The Remaining Oil Life parameter will be read from the Engine Control Module and displayed again. It will read 100% if the reset has been successful.

63

FastCheck
Land Rover vehicles
There are two options available for Land Rover.

Service Interval Reset

This option resets the conventional service interval indicator. This function is to be used AFTER a full service has been completed on the vehicle.

Oil Degradation Counter Reset

This option is necessary on vehicles which have Diesel Particulate Filters (DPF) fitted. This is not necessary on vehicles with petrol or LPG engines or diesel engines if DPF is not fitted. The counter should only be reset AFTER the oil has been changed.

Mercedes Vehicles
There are two different types of servicing for Mercedes, Assyst Plus and Flexible Service System. The service type will automatically be determined from the vehicle. Assyst Plus: NOTE: Any DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) present on the Assyst Plus control module may lead to incorrect servicing information and services to be preformed incorrectly. Different variants of Assyst Plus have different service functions available. Assyst Plus Service Functions

Reset indicator Additional work Service status Service history Undo reset Undo additional Read DTCs Clear DTCs

Reset indicator This function is used to reset the overall maintenance of the vehicle. The current service status information will be displayed. To abort the reset, press the key. Confirmation of the service being aborted will be displayed, press any key for this point to return to the Assyst Plus menu. To proceed with the reset press . The oil quality must be selected before the reset can be completed. To abort the reset, press the key. Confirmation the reset has aborted will be displayed, press any key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. To select the oil quality used for the service from

64

FastCheck
the menu use the and keys and press to confirm the selection.

The result of the reset will be displayed, press any key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Additional work This function is used to add additional service options to the latest service held within the service memory. The application will display a menu of all available additional work options applicable for the vehicle. Press the and keys to scroll through the available list.

Press the key to select/deselect an item. Multiple items can be selected and any items selected are highlighted by . Press the key to abort and return to the Assyst Plus menu. Press to add these selected options to the last service memory. The result of the reset will be displayed, press any key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Service status This function displays the current service status information. Use the and keys to scroll through the status information. Press the exit and return to the Assyst Plus menu. NOTE: It can take some time for the control unit to update the service status information after a change in state (e.g. Resetting the service indicator). Service history This function allows the operator to review the entries held within the service memory. The application will display the number of service entries currently stored within the service memory. Press the key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Select the desired entry using the and keys and press to confirm the selection. Press the key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Press through the service information stored in memory. Undo Reset This function cancels the latest service stored in the service history (i.e. the last performed service). A warning will be displayed before the cancel process is performed. This option is only intended for resetting a service that has accidentally been reset. Press to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Press to cancel the last service. Confirmation of the cancellation will be displayed. Press any key for this point to return to the Assyst Plus menu. and keys to scroll key to

65

FastCheck
NOTE: Services which have been cancelled remain in the service history. The Entry will be marked as irrelevant and with data held within will be reset. The Undo Reset is only possible if there is an existing service held within the service memory. Undo additional This function cancels any additional work applied the latest service stored in the service history the last preformed service. A warning will be displayed before the undo process is performed. This option is only intended for resetting an additional service option that has accidentally been reset. A menu of all the additional work available from the vehicles last service. Press and keys to scroll through the available list.

Press the key to select/deselect an item. Multiple items can be selected and any items selected are highlighted by . Press to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Press to remove the selected options from the service memory. The result of the undo will be displayed, press any key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. NOTE: Undo is only possible if there is an existing service held within the service memory and the selected service options are applicable to the latest service. Flexible Service System: Select Service Reset and press menu, press the key. to confirm the selection. To return to a previous

When prompted to, check that all the vehicle's doors are closed, then press any button on the OmiCheck to have the oil or service light reset. WARNING: Be sure to close all the vehicle's doors before sending the reset command. Not doing so can result in permanent damage to the vehicle's instrument panel. You will receive the message "Mercedes Reset" to confirm the reset process was completed successfully.

MG Rover Vehicles
Scroll through the list of available vehicle models and press selection. To return to a previous menu, press the key. to confirm the

When prompted to, check that all the vehicle's doors are closed, then press any button on the OmiCheck to have the oil or service light reset. You will receive the message "MG Rover Reset" to confirm the reset process was completed successfully.

66

FastCheck
Saab Vehicles
Select 'Interval and Oil' and press menu, press the key. to confirm the selection. To return to a previous

You will receive the message "Saab Reset" to confirm the reset process was completed successfully.

Volvo Vehicles
Select 'Service' and press press the key. to confirm the selection. To return to a previous menu,

You will receive the message "Volvo Reset" to confirm the reset process was completed successfully.

VAG (Volkswagen and Audi) vehicle

Manufacturer Option 1
VAG Service Reset

Option 2
Service Reset

Option 3

Option 4

Option 5

Adaptation - Refer to Variable Service Reset section Long Life Oil Service Reset N/A Set Oil Type Diesel V6 TDI Petrol Non Long Life Oil View Oil Type N/A Non Long Life Oil Service Service Reset N/A Inspection 1 Inspection 2 N/A N/A

Use the and keys to select the required menu option and press selection. To return to a previous menu, press the key.

to confirm the

You will receive the message "VAG Reset" to confirm the reset process was completed successfully.

67

FastCheck
Variable Service Reset (VAG)
For some VAG (Audi and VW) vehicles manufactured since 2000, the variable service reset option must be used. Refer to the Vehicle Application List. WARNING: Changing the baseline / learn values of any channel could have adverse effects on engine performance and running. If you have any doubt please consult somebody familiar with the system. Service Type
Service

Adaptation Channel Counter Contents

Service Reset 2 40 41 42 43 44 45 Reset service counters (distance and time) Distance travelled since last service 100. Time elapsed (in days) since last service Lower limit for distance to next inspection Upper limit for distance to next inspection Upper limit for time to next inspection Quality of engine oil

Value to Reset
00000 00000 00000 -----------------

To reset the service interval, use the to confirm the selection.

and

keys to select channel 2 and press

Change the value of the channel to 00000 to reset the both the time and distance service counters. Use the and keys to change each digit to 0 and press to confirm. NOTE: Channels 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and 45 are used when installing a new instrument pack.Values from the original instrument pack must be entered into the new instrument pack to ensure that vehicle servicing is carried out at the correct intervals.

68

FastCheck
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)
The TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) function can be used to re-program tyre valves on vehicles fitted with Schrader TPMS valves, refer to the coverage in the table below: Manufacturer
Citroen C5 C5 II C6 C8 Peugeot 607 607 II 807 Fiat Lancia Renault Laguna II Espace IV Vel Statis Ulysse Phedra Megane II Scenic II 307 II 407

Vehicle - Type 1

Vehicle - Type 2
C4

Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat and Lancia (Type 1)

For Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat and Lancia, the only option is to program all valves using the following procedure: 1. When requested excite each TPMS valve in turn starting with the front left wheel, front right wheel, rear right then rear left wheel. In order to excite the valves, an exciter such as the Omitec OmiDetect tool should be used. When excited, the valve is forced to transmit its valve code and status to the vehicles body control module. 2. When the body control module receives the transmission, it stores the tyre valve code for the current wheel which is also indicated by the OmiCheck. 3. When each valve code has been programmed, the OmiCheck will show a confirmation message will appear at which point you can confirm programming or abort.

69

FastCheck
Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat and Lancia (Type 2)
With these vehicles all tyres need to be inflated to 3.7 bar for programming to be successful. In order to excite the valves to transmit their codes an exciter such as the Omitec OmiDetect tool should be used. Follow the on screen instructions which indicate the order the wheels are to be programmed in. The spare wheel is included along with the other wheels, but if this option is not supported by the vehicle, a message will appear after a few seconds to indicate this. NOTE: Remember to reset the correct tyre pressures when finished.

Renault
General NOTE: For Renault vehicles which use the Renault Card Keyless Ignition System and the START button (Megane II, Scenic II etc.): To switch the ignition on WITHOUT starting the engine: 1. Unlock the car with the remote (card). 2. Insert the card into the card reader. 3. Without pressing the brake or clutch pedal push and hold the START button for at least 5 seconds. The dash should illuminate and the button should be released. All diagnostics can now be carried out. TPMS is the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System. Each valve sensor has a unique code and is matched to a particular wheel. This is programmed into the UCH control module. This enables a faulty wheel to be identified (given that the receiver can identify which wheel is transmitting). The sensor emits an RF (Radio Frequency) signal containing the valve code, status and tyre pressure. If wheels are to be swapped around then reprogramming will need to be carried out to identify the new position of the wheel. Each valve sensor has a coloured ring attached to the valve nut, each colour corresponds to a particular wheel position: Front Left: Green Front Right: Yellow Rear Left: Red Rear Right: Black It is recommended that if tyres are moved around that the coloured rings are replaced in the correct wheel position.

70

FastCheck
Each valve sensor will emit a signal every hour if stationary, and every 15 minutes if a leak is present. If moving it will emit a signal every minute if no leak present, and every 10 seconds if a leak is present. NOTE: In the live data the tyre pressures will display a default value of 3.5 bar until the valves have been forced to transmit.

Renault (Type 1)
This feature allows the user to read and clear faults, view live data, test the TPMS display lights and reprogram the unit via the Command Menu. The Command Menu features are: 1. Program tyre valves - This allows the user to program 1 valve or 4 valves by a. Manually entering the valve code from the keypad. The code is written on a label if the sensor is new, or if the sensor is used then remove the tyre and read the code on the sensor b. Automatically forcing the valve to emit the code by using an exciter (such as the Omitec OmiDetect tool), or deflating the tyre pressure by at least 1 bar, or rotating the wheel by more than 20 km/h. When deflating the tyre the valve will not transmit until 15 minutes has elapsed. NOTE: If fault code 0007 is present, automatic coding will not be possible. When using the exciter it should be placed resting on the tyre under the appropriate valve. When the sensor has been excited and the transmitted code has been received the OmiCheck will indicate a successful read. The option is then given to program the new code. 2. Select the winter tyre option - This is used during the winter in some countries where the weather conditions require winter tyres. 3. Select the summer tyre option - This is used as default or during the summer when winter tyres are changed. 4. Set control module with TPMS option - Programs the control module with the TPMS option. 5. Set control module without TPMS option - Disables the TPMS option. 6. Set tyre pressure limits - Enables the setting of maximum and minimum tyre pressure limits. 7. Change trigger limit. 8. Drive the actuator - Tests the TPMS display lights.

71

FastCheck
Renault (Type 2)
With these vehicles all tyres need to be inflated to 3.7 bar for programming to be successful. In order to excite the valves to transmit their codes an exciter such as the Omitec OmiDetect tool should be used. An option is given as to select the current tyre set (Summer/Winter). Follow the on screen instructions which indicate the order the wheels are to be programmed in. After operating the exciter alongside the requested wheel, if successful a message will be displayed on the screen indicating that the valve code has been detected and displaying the valve code. After all 4 wheel codes have been successfully detected then an option is given to program the codes. NOTE: Remember to reset the correct tyre pressures when finished.

TPMS Trouble shooting

If a valve appears to not respond when stimulated with an exciter tool, check the following: The tyre valve is a TPMS valve. The exciter is not pointing directly at the valve stem. The valve stem is metal and will prevent a good RF signal. On low profile tyres, the area for the RF to penetrate the tyre sidewall is small, carefully aim the exciter half-way between the tyre rim and the tread. Check the batteries are not low in the exciter and the TPMS valve. If there is no response from the valve after the checks have been made then it could be that the TPMS valve itself is faulty.

Manual TPMS Process BMW

Run-flat Reset (RPA Tyre Deflation Detection) The run-flat system monitors the pressure in the four mounted tyres while the vehicle is being driven. The system will provide an alert whenever the inflation pressure in a tyre drops significantly in relation to the pressure of another tyre. The following BMW vehicles have the RPA system fitted: BMW 3 Series (E90/E91/E92/E93) BMW 5 Series (E60/E61) BMW 7 Series (E65/E66/E67/E68) BMW X3 (E83) BMW X5 (E53)

72

FastCheck
It is necessary to initiate the RPA reset process IMMEDIATELY after every tyre pressure correction, after a tyre or wheel change or after a trailer has been attached or detached. The reset MUST be started before driving the vehicle for the first time after one of the above events. When a reset is required (due to a pressure change in one of the tyres) the vehicle will inform the driver by turning on the RPA Warning Lamp, which will glow red, and sounding an acoustic signal.

When the RPA Warning Lamp is on but the colour is yellow this indicates that the RPA system has failed or is malfunctioning. In this case the system must be diagnosed using a OmiCheck. The RPA reset process can be started in two different ways depending on the model. For vehicles with an iDrive (BMW 5 Series (E60/E61), BMW 7 Series (E65/E66/ E67/E68)): On iDrive open the menu. Select Vehicle Settings. Select FTM. Start the Engine but do NOT start driving. Select Set Tyre Pressure. Select Yes. Start to drive the vehicle, the message initialising should be displayed on the iDrive screen. The Reset will terminate during shortly after while the vehicle is being driven. The message Status: Active should be displayed on the iDrive screen when the Reset has terminated correctly. If the vehicle is stopped while the reset is occurring the reset will be interrupted and will be resumed when the vehicle is driven again. For BMW 3 Series (E90/E91/E92/E93): Start the engine but do NOT start driving. Use the menu control button on the indicator stalk to move up or down until the RESET menu item appears. Press the select button on the end of the indicator stalk to confirm your choice of the Run Flat Indicator reset option. Hold the button down for approximately 5 seconds until the RESET? symbol is shown.

73

FastCheck
Drive off. The Reset will terminate without informing the driver of success. If the Reset has not been carried out correctly however the RPA Warning Lamp will glow red and the process must be repeated. If the vehicle is stopped while the reset is occurring the reset will be interrupted and will be resumed when the vehicle is driven again. For BMW X3 (E53), BMW X5 (E83): Start the engine but do NOT start driving. Hold down the button (shown in the diagram below) for approximately 5 seconds, or until the RPA Warning Lamp glows yellow.

OM1345

The Warning Lamp should stay yellow for 5 seconds to indicate that the Reset has started. Drive off. The Reset will terminate without informing the driver of success. If the Reset has not been carried out correctly however the RPA Warning Lamp will glow red and the process must be repeated. If the vehicle is stopped while the reset is occurring the reset will be interrupted and will be resumed when the vehicle is driven again.

74

FastCheck
Mini
Run-flat Reset (RPA Tyre Deflation Detection) The run-flat system monitors the pressure in the four mounted tyres while the vehicle is being driven. The system will provide an alert whenever the inflation pressure in a tyre drops significantly in relation to the pressure of another tyre. It is necessary to initiate the RPA reset process IMMEDIATELY after every tyre pressure correction, after a tyre or wheel change or after a trailer has been attached or detached. The reset MUST be started before driving the vehicle for the first time after one of the above events. When a reset is required (due to a pressure change in one of the tyres) the vehicle will inform the driver by turning on the RPA Warning Lamp, which will glow red, and sounding an acoustic signal.

When the RPA Warning Lamp is on but the colour is yellow this indicates that the RPA system has failed or is malfunctioning. In this case the system must be diagnosed using a BMW OmiCheck. The RPA reset process is as follows: Start the engine but do NOT start driving. Press the RPA Reset button (shown in the diagram below) and hold down for at least 5 seconds, or until the RPA Warning Lamp on the indicator panel glows yellow.

75

FastCheck

OM1346

The Warning Lamp should stay yellow for 5 seconds to indicate that the Reset has started. Drive off. The Reset will terminate without informing the driver of success. If the Reset has not been carried out correctly however the RPA Warning Lamp will glow red and the process must be repeated. If the vehicle is stopped while the reset is occurring the reset will be interrupted and will be resumed when the vehicle is driven again.

76

Manufacturer Applications
Manufacturer Applications

General
The list of manufacturer specific applications loaded onto the OmiCheck depends on the applications purchased with your OmiCheck package. As with all applications, the and keys are used to select the desired option, and the key used to confirm the selection. Most manufacturer applications follow the same or similar procedures. Certain manufacturer applications require extra information. The following topics cover the extra information required to support these applications.

77

Manufacturer Applications
Audi, Seat, Skoda and Volkswagen
Service Reset
The Service Reset option allows the technician to access and reset the oil and inspection service indicator on instrument packs fitted before May 1999. For vehicles manufactured after this date, and for all non-European vehicles, service reset should be done using the adaption option. By using the Service Reset option the OmiCheck will write the necessary reset value to the required channel. The value and channel are based on the make and model of the particular VAG vehicle.

Live Data (VAG Mode 8)

Live data can be viewed for all systems by selecting the appropriate Data Group for the vehicle under test (see data groups codes listed above). To view live data, select system from the 'Systems Menu' and follow on-screen instructions. Whilst viewing any live data display group another display group may be accessed by pressing the or keys. The description for each displayed live data item can be viewed by pressing the key.

Ignition (transponder) Key Re-programming

This procedure is required if keys are lost, a replacement Engine Management ECM is fitted, new or additional ignition (transponder) keys needs to be matched to the vehicle. When transponder (ignition) keys are matched to the vehicle the key data is stored in the memory of the immobiliser ECU and used to recognise and validate the ignition keys. The matching of ignition (transponder) keys to a particular vehicle requires the use of the following functions: Login ECM and Adaptation. The Login ECM function enables the technician to enter the 5 or 7 digit login code. A valid login code must be entered in order to program new ignition (transponder) keys for all VAG cars. The Adaptation function enables the technician to adapt new and additional ignition (transponder) keys. The procedure for matching the ignition transponder must be carried out for all of the ignition keys, including the existing ones. The number of keys already matched will be displayed when the key matching channel is selected via Adaptation. If the vehicle is matched with only one key the vehicle can be start immediately with this key. If more than one key has been matched to the vehicle only the last key can be used to start the vehicle immediately. The key matching process will terminate if an already matched ignition key is used to switch the ignition on again and the ignition remained switch on for longer than a 1 second. It will also terminate, if the permissible key matching period of 30 seconds is exceeded. In both cases the ECM will store Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC).

78

Manufacturer Applications
Re-programming transponder keys
Preliminary Requirements Ensure that all keys to be matched to the vehicle are available. ECM supports Login ECM and the correct Login Code is available. OmiCheck diagnostic tester.

Adding transponder keys to vehicle with separate Immobiliser ECM

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicles data link connector. Switch ignition on with the first key to be matched to the immobiliser ECM. From System Menu select the Immobiliser ECM. From Function Menu select Login ECM. Follow on-screen instructions and enter login code, including any leading zeroes. On acceptance of the code Code accepted will be displayed, otherwise an appropriate error message will be displayed. From the Function Menu select Adaptation. Enter channel number 1, the value displayed for the entered channel is the number of keys currently matched. Follow on-screen instructions to enter the total number of keys to be matched. Switch ignition off and remove key. Insert in the ignition the next key to be matched and switch the ignition on, the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light with switch on for approximately 2 seconds and then go out. This indicates that the key in the ignition is now matched to the vehicle immobiliser. Before the 30 seconds matching time ends and the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light goes out, repeat steps 10 and11 for each remaining key until all keys have been matched. When the last ignition key in the sequence is matched with VDO instrument cluster the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light goes out after matching the last ignition key. With Motometer instrument cluster the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light flashes briefly after the last key is matched. Repeat step 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. Enter channel number 0. Follow on-screen instructions to erase learned values. This will enable the re-learning procedure of the immobiliser ECM. Note: Possible vehicles with separate Immobiliser are: Audi models up to 1997, mark 3 Golfs, Passat B4, Transporter, Lupo and Sharan vans.

12.

13.

14. 15. 16.

79

Manufacturer Applications
Adding transponder keys to vehicle with Immobiliser in the instrument cluster
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicles data link connector. Switch ignition on with the key you want to match. From System Menu select the Instrument ECM. From Function Menu select Login ECM. Follow on-screen instructions and enter login code, including any leading zeroes. On acceptance of the code Code accepted will be displayed, otherwise appropriate error message will be displayed. From the Function Menu select Adaptation. Enter channel number 21, the value displayed for the entered channel is the number of keys currently matched. Follow on-screen instructions to enter the total number of keys to be matched. Switch ignition off and remove key. Insert in the ignition the next key to be matched and switch the ignition on, the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light with switch on for approximately 2 seconds and then go out. This indicates that the key in the ignition is now matched to the vehicle immobiliser. Before the 30 seconds matching time ends and the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light goes out, repeat steps 10 and 11 for each remaining key until all keys have been matched. When the last ignition key in the sequence is matched with VDO instrument cluster the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light goes out after matching the last ignition key. With Motometer instrument cluster the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light flashes briefly after the last key is matched. Repeat step 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. Enter channel number 0. Follow on-screen instructions to erase learned values. This will enable the re-learning procedure of the immobiliser ECM. Note: Possible vehicles with Immobiliser in the instrument cluster: Audi models from 1997, mark 4, 5 Golfs, Passat B5 and B6.

12.

13.

14. 15. 16.

80

Manufacturer Applications
Tips on the use of Basic Settings and Adaptation function
On replacement of a vehicle sensor, basic settings can be used to enable the ECU to re-learn quickly the operating conditions of the new sensor as opposed to learning the operating conditions over time. This is done by selection of display group 0 or the display group in which the sensor measured value would appear. On replacement of a vehicle ECM with an existing (used) ECM, the adaptation function can be used to erase all previously learned values retuning the ECU to the factory default settings; this gives the ECM the chance of re-learning the operating conditions of the attached sensors. This is done by selection of adaptation channel 0 and then following the onscreen instructions.

81

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes Engine Code: ADX, AEA, ABD, ABU and AEV
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda value. Operating condition (see Table 1 for the relevance of these figures). Engine speed. Injection period. Battery voltage. Intake air temperature.

1. Engine speed. 2. Engine load signal. 3. Throttle valve angle. Calculated figure, dependent on throttle valve potentiometer. 4. Ignition timing value. Calculated figure, dependent on the ignition timing adjustment (this value must not be used to check or adjust ignition timing). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load signal. Road speed (for engine code ABD > 9.94, the speed will not be shown). Operating condition (see Table 1 for the relevance of these figures). Engine speed. Duty cycle (of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve 1). Lambda correction factor. Mixture correction factor. Engine speed. Duty cycle (of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve 1). Lambda correction factor. Mixture correction factor. Engine speed. Lambda probe voltage. Lambda correction factor. Operating condition (see Table 1 for the relevance of the figures). Engine speed. Load. Knock control number 1 cylinder (ignition retardation). Knock control number 2 cylinder (ignition retardation). Engine speed. Load. Knock control number 3 cylinder. Knock control number 4 cylinder.

82

Manufacturer Applications
10 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Load. Integral knock number 1 cylinder. Integral knock number 2 cylinder. Engine speed. Load. Integral knock number 3 cylinder. Integral knock number 4 cylinder.

11

83

Manufacturer Applications
Table 1 - Operating Conditions (AEA only)
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit block X 1 1 X X X X X X X Display Group 1 No. 1 cylinder recognised Idling switch closed Display Group 4 Display Group 7 Activated charcoal filter system solenoid valve 1 active Lambda control active Acceleration or full load enrichment

1 1

AT recognised A/C compressor switched on (`1' must not be displayed) 1 A/C switched on ('1' must not be displayed) 1 1 Speed boost gear engaged Torque reduction (display must always show '1') 1 Gear engaged (if '1' is displayed)

Acceleration or full load enrichment

Full load recognised

Full load recognised

Part load recognised Idling switch closed

Part load recognised Idling switch closed

Overrun cut-off active

Overrun cut-off active

Engine Code: AAM, ABS and ADZ

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda correction factor. Operating condition (see Table 2 for the relevance of these figures). Engine speed. Injection period. Battery voltage. Intake air temperature.

84

Manufacturer Applications
3 1. Engine speed. 2. Engine load signal. 3. Throttle valve angle. Calculated figure, dependent on throttle valve potentiometer. 4. Ignition timing value. Calculated figure, dependent on the ignition timing adjustment (this value must not be used to check or adjust ignition timing). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load signal. Road speed (0 to 7, with 4 as a centred value). Operating condition (see Table 1 for the relevance of these figures). Engine speed. Duty cycle (of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve 1). Lambda correction factor. Mixture correction factor.

85

Manufacturer Applications
Table 2 - Operating Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit block X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X X X X Display Group 1 Idling switch closed A/C compressor switched on A/C switched on Torque reduction (display must always show '1') 1 Driving stage engaged Display Group 4 Acceleration or full load enrichment Full load recognised Part load recognised Idling switch closed

Overrun cut-off active

Engine Code: AEK

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda value. Ignition timing. Engine speed. Injection period. Battery voltage. Not relevant. Engine speed. Engine load signal. Throttle valve angle. Intake manifold temperature. Engine speed. Engine load signal. Road speed signal. Operating condition (see Table 3 for the relevance of these figures). Engine speed. Learned idling stabilisation value. Idling stabilisation valve duty cycle. Adjustment requirements (see Table 3 for the relevance of these figures).

86

Manufacturer Applications
6 1. Lambda factor. 2. Learned idling adaption value (specification range not currently available). 3. Learned part load adaption value (specification range not currently available). 4. Learned full load adaption value (specification range not currently available).

87

Manufacturer Applications
Table 3 - Engine Code AEK
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit block X X X X 1 1 1 1 X 1 Display Group 4 Overrun Idling Part load Full load Acceleration Display Group 5 Not relevant Signal from AT N/A A/C stand-by A/C compressor switched on

Engine Code: ABF (Digifant 3.0)

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Lambda probe voltage. Injection period

1. Coolant temperature. 2. Engine speed. 3. Throttle valve angle. Calculated figure, (dependent on throttle valve potentiometer). 4. Injection period. 1. 2. 3. 4. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Intake air temperature. Battery voltage.

1. Coolant temperature. 2. Engine speed. 3. Ignition timing. Calculated figure (this value must not be used to check or adjust ignition timing). 4. Engine load. 1. Coolant temperature. 2. Engine speed. 3. Throttle valve angle. Calculated figure, (dependent on throttle valve potentiometer). 4. Battery voltage. Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed Coolant temperature. Lambda probe voltage. Adjustment conditions (see Table 4 for the relevance of these figures).

Engine Code: ABF (Digifant 3.2)

Display Group 1

88

Manufacturer Applications
2 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Injection period. Battery voltage. Intake air temperature.

1. Engine speed. 2. Engine load. 3. Throttle valve angle. Calculated figure, (dependent on throttle valve potentiometer). 4. Intake air temperature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Not relevant. Operating condition (see Table 4 for the relevance of these figures). Engine speed. Engine load. N/A Operating condition (see Table 4 for the relevance of these figures). Lambda integration value (see note below). Lambda integration value (see note below). Learning value for idling stabilisation. Intake air temperature.

NOTE: Always observe the values in lines 1 and 2 of this display group together. If a 0 is displayed in line 1, line 2 must show a value between 0 and 70. If 225 is displayed in line 1, line 2 must show a value between 144 and 255.

89

Manufacturer Applications
Table 4 - Operating Conditions
X 1 X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X X X Display groups 1, 4 & 5 line 4 Fault stored in memory Not assigned A/C compressor switched on Idling switch open Fault in lambda control Throttle valve closed Engine speed above 2500 rpm Coolant temperature below 80C

Engine Code: 2E
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Lambda probe voltage. Injection time. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Throttle angle. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Air intake temperature. Battery voltage. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Calculated ignition point. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Throttle angle. Battery voltage.

Engine Code: 1Z
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Quantity injected. Voltage supplied (specified). Coolant temperature

90

Manufacturer Applications
2 1. Engine speed 2. Accelerator pedal position 3. Operating condition (see Table 5 for the relevance of the figures in line 3). 4. Coolant temperature 1. Engine speed. 2. Mass of air drawn in (specified). 3. Mass of air drawn in (Actual. The measurement requires that the EGR system be switched off after a period of approximately 10 minutes at idle speed, requiring a burst of throttle or an engine restart to switch it back on). 4. EGR valve duty cycle (specified). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Commencement of injection (specified). Commencement of injection (actual). Duty cycle commencement of injection valve. Engine speed. Start quantity Commencement of injection (specified). Coolant temperature

1. Vehicle speed. 2. Brake pedal monitor (see Table 5 for the relevance of the figures in line 2). 3. Cruise control system (see separate cruise control table F for the relevance of the figures in line 3). 4. Cruise control system (vehicles fitted with cruise control system display 0, vehicles without cruise control system display 255). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fuel temperature. No display. Intake manifold temperature. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Quantity injected (driver's requirement - pedal position Injection quantity limitation value (from torque map). Injection quantity limitation value (from opacity map). Engine speed. Quantity injected (cruise control system active). Injection quantity limitation (Cruise control active). Voltage supplied (from opacity map). Mass of air drawn in (actual). Atmospheric pressure (ambient) Intake manifold pressure (charge pressure). Accelerator pedal position.

10

91

Manufacturer Applications
11 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Charge pressure (specified). Charge pressure (actual). Duty cycle from charge pressure limitation valve. Not relevant. Glow period. Voltage supply from control unit. Coolant temperature. Quantity injected (deviation - No. 4 cylinder to No. 3 cylinder). Quantity injected (deviation - No. 2 cylinder to No. 3 cylinder). Quantity injected (deviation - No. 1 cylinder to No. 3 cylinder). No display.

12

13

92

Manufacturer Applications
Table 5
Relevance when '1' is displayed in the three digit block X 1 X X Display Group 2 - Line 3 Idling speed boost when air conditioning system is switched on 1 Idling speed switch closed (accelerator pedal position below 17%) 1 Conditioner compressor on Display Group 6 - Line 2 Clutch pedal switch open (brake pedal open) Brake pedal switch open (brake pedal operated) Brake pedal switch open (brake pedal operated)

Table 6
Relevance when '1' is displayed in the 5 digit block X 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X Display Group 6 - LIne 3 Clutch pedal switch open (clutch pedal operated) Brake light switch closed (brake pedal operated) Speed accepted Speed accepted Cruise control system on

Engine Code: ABV

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine temperature. Lambda factor. Ignition angle. Engine speed. Injection time. System voltage. EGR temperature (if acceptable). Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Intake manifold temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Road speed. Operating status (see Table 7 for the relevance of the figures in line 4).

93

Manufacturer Applications
5 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Idling speed stabilisation valve. Duty cycle. Operating status (see Table 7 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Lambda factor. Lambda adaption (Idle). Lambda adaption (part load). Lambda adaption (full throttle).

94

Manufacturer Applications
Table 7
Relevance when '1' is displayed in the 5 digit block X X X X X Operating status Display group 4 (5 block numeric group - Operating status may also be shown, for example acceleration from part load, as 10100). Acceleration enrichment 1 1 1 Full throttle Part load Idling speed Operating status. Display group 5 (4 block numeric group - Operating status may be also shown, for example Air con. compressor and air con. on, as 11 Display Group 1). Not relevant Air conditioning compressor on Air conditioning on Gearbox intervention (auto gearbox) Driving position (auto gearbox only)

Overrun cut-off

Operating statuses Not relevant not OK, interrogate fault memory again

Engine Code: ADY and AGG

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda probe voltage. Adjustment condition (see Table 8 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Injection period. Battery voltage. Intake air temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Duty cycle (off throttle valve positioner).

95

Manufacturer Applications
4 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Road speed. Engine operating condition (see Table 8 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Duty cycle (for activated charcoal filter). Consumption signal. Operating condition (of Lambda control (see Table 9 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Additive learning value (for Lambda control at idling). Multiplicative learning value (for Lambda control at part/full load range). Multiplicative learning value (for throttle valve positioner duty cycle). Multiplicative learning value (for throttle valve positioner duty cycle with auto gearbox). Co-ordination (of Hall sender to engine speed sensor). Co-ordination (of Hall sender to engine speed sensor). Altitude correction value Operating condition (of throttle valve positioner. Refer to Table 8 for the relevance of the figures in line 4).

96

Manufacturer Applications
Table 8
Relevance when '1' is displayed in the 8 digit block X X X X X X X X Adjustment Conditions Display Group 1 Not relevant 1 1 Signal from automatic gearbox Air conditioner compressor switched on 1 1 1 1 1 Idling switch on Fault in the Lambda control Throttle valve open Engine running Coolant temperature below 80C Engine Operating Conditions Display Group 4 Overrun Idling Part load

Full load Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant

Table 9
Relevance when 1 is displayed in the 8 digit block X X X X X X X Lambda Control Operating condition Display Group 5 Coding for synchro 1 1 1 1 1 1 Not relevant Not relevant Lambda control at limit Diagnostic fault Lambda probe operationally ready Rich mixture (0= lean mixture) Throttle Valve Control Operating Condition Display Group 7 Mechanical emergency running Not relevant Adaption necessary Adaption necessary Not relevant Adaption terminated (battery voltage too low) Idle switch open

Engine Code: ABK

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (idling). Coolant temperature. Lambda probe voltage (fluctuates). Setting condition (see Table 10 for the relevance of the figures in line 4).

97

Manufacturer Applications
2 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Injection time (computed value between 1.5 and 3.5 ms at idle speed). Digifant control unit voltage supply. Intake air temperature Engine speed. Engine loading (idling). Throttle valve angle (0 to 2.0% full load greater than 75%). Duty cycle (off idling speed stabilisation valve (idling)). Engine speed. Engine load. Road speed signal (stationary = 255, driving = 0). Engine load operating state (see Table 11 for the relevance of the figures in line 4).

1. Engine speed. 2. Duty cycle - Of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve -N80 (Valve fully open = 100% valve closed =0%). This is closed when engine is idling and so long as Lambda control is not active. 3. Consumption signal - On board computer calculation. The signal can checked by observing it with the engine idling, then 'blipping' the throttle to raise the engine speed and releasing immediately to bring the overrun fuel cut-off function in. At idle the reading should indicate 1, should then increase, drop to 0 then return to 1 again. 4. Operating condition (of Lambda control (see Table 9 for the relevance of the figures in line 4)

98

Manufacturer Applications
Table 10 - Setting Conditions Table
Relevance when '1' is displayed in the 8 digit block. These setting conditions are met only when 8 zeros are indicated. X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X X X X Display Group 1 - Line 4 Not relevant Ignition angle retardation during gearshift active (auto only) AC compressor not switched off (switched automatically) Idling switch not closed Lambda control switched off Throttle valve open Engine speed within valid range Engine temperature less than 80C

Table 11 - Engine Load Operating State Table

Relevance when '1' is displayed in the 8 digit block. Read-out = 0, operating state not achieved. Read-out = 1, operating state achieved X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X X X Display Group 4 - line 4 Overrun fuel cut-off (10000000) Idling (01000000) Part load (0010000) Full Load (00010000) Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant

Engine Code: AAE

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda control value. Operating state (see Table 12 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Injection time (computed value between 1.5 and 3.5 ms at idle speed). Battery voltage Intake air temperature

99

Manufacturer Applications
3 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle (idling 0 to 2.0%, full load greater than 75%). ignition angle. Engine speed. Engine load. Road speed signal (Stationary = 255, driving = 0). Operating state (see Table 12 for the relevance of the figures in line 4).

1. Engine speed. 2. Duty cycle - Operating states may be combined on the display, dependent on the status of the vehicle equipment active at that particular time. 3. Lambda control valve. 4. Mixture correction factor.

100

Manufacturer Applications
Table 12 - Setting Conditions Table
Relevance when '1' or '0' is displayed in the 8 digit block X X 1 1 X X X X X X Operating State Display Group 1 Idling contact closed AC compressor on Operating state Display 4 Acceleration enrichment/lean mixture on deceleration Full load -

1 0

Air conditioner on Torque reduction (gearshift intervention in auto gearbox) 1 Driving stage (automatic gearbox)

Idling contact closed Overrun cut-off

Engine Code: ABC

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Intake manifold pressure (100% = 1022 hPa, 32% = 327 hPa). Not relevant Idling stabilisation position (18 to 75 steps at idle). Throttle valve angle. Not relevant. Coolant temperature. Intake air temperature. Lambda learning factor (cylinders 1 to 3, 0.84 to 1.12). Not relevant. Lambda control factor (cylinders 1 to 3, 0.84 to 1.2). Not relevant. Not relevant. Not relevant. Lambda control factor (cylinders 1 to 3). Not relevant. Engine speed. Knock control depth (base read-out = 60). Not relevant. Coolant temperature. Idling stabilisation position. Idling stabilisation learning value. Idling stabilisation disturbance influence. Not relevant.

101

Manufacturer Applications
7 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Idling stabilisation position. Coolant temperature. Lambda learning factor (cylinders 1 to 3). Not relevant. Idling stabilisation position. Coolant temperature. Lambda learning factor (cylinders 1 to 3). Not relevant. Coolant temperature. Idling switch position (0 = open, 1 = closed). Not relevant. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Idling switch position (0= open, 1 = closed). Lambda learning factor (cylinders 1 to 3). Not relevant.

10

102

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Code: AAH (and ABC for A4 models '95 on)
Display Group 1 Description 1. Coolant temperature (85 to 105C up to 05/94, 85 to 110C 06/94 on). 2. Air mass meter output voltage (1.45 to 1.58V, or 1.47 to 1.62V, dependent on valve-gear type). 3. Altitude read-out (0 to 0.025V up to 05/94, or 0 to 255). 4. Voltage supply to ECU (battery voltage) - 12.0 to 14.0V. 1. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage (voltage 0.25 to 4.75V - idle speed through to full load). 2. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage (voltage 0.25 to 1.275V - idle speed at lower part of load range). 3. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage (programmed value (0.25 to 0.50V). 4. Mechanical idle switch. (0 = open, 1 = closed). 1. Engine speed - Idle speed 700 to 800 rpm up to 05/94 then 650 to 750 or 700 to 800 rpm from 06/94 on dependent upon valve-gear type fitted. 2. Engine load - 15 to 32% up to 05/94, then 15 to 32% or 15 to 35% from 06/94 on dependent upon valve-gear type fitted 3. Throttle valve angle - With ignition on only 0% (idle) or greater than 95% (full load). 4. Vehicle speed. 1. Idling speed controller - At idle. Range between -2 and 2. 2. Idling speed stabilisation value - Automatic gearbox with 'N' or 'P' selected, manual gearbox in neutral. Manual = -16 to 14, auto = -20 to 10 3. Idling speed stabilisation value - Automatic gearbox in 'D', 1, 2, 3, or 'R', Manual always = 0, auto. = -20 to 10. 4. Gearbox input when engine idling 0 = off, and 1 = on. Refer to Table 13. 1. Lambda programmed value - -25 to 25% at idling speed (bank 1). 2. Lambda programmed value - -19 to 19% (vehicles to 05/94), -25 to 25% (vehicles 06/94 on), at part load 1 (bank 1). 3. Lambda programmed value - -19 to 19% (vehicles to 05/94), -25 to 25% (vehicles 06/94 on), at part load 2 (bank 1). 4. Lambda programmed value - -19 to 19% (vehicles to 05/94), -25 to 25% (vehicles 06/94 on), at part load 3 (bank 1). 1. Lambda programmed value - -25 to 25% at idling speed (bank 2). 2. Lambda programmed value - -19 to 19% (vehicles to 05/94), -25 to 25% (vehicles 06/94 on), at part load 1(bank 2). 3. Lambda programmed value - -19 to 19% (vehicles to 05/94), -25 to 25% (vehicles 06/94 on), at part load 2 (bank 2). 4. Lambda programmed value - -19 to 19% (vehicles to 05/94), -25 to 25% (vehicles 06/94 on), at part load 3 (bank 2).

103

Manufacturer Applications
7 1. Lambda control (bank 1) - -6.0 to 6.0%. 2. Lambda programme range display (see Table 14 for the relevance of the figures in line 2). 3. Lambda programme demand diagnosis (see Table 15 for the relevance of the figures in line 3). 4. Lambda programme demand display (see Table 15 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Not relevant. 1. Lambda control (bank 2) - -6.0 to 6.0%. 2. Lambda programme range display (see Table 14 for the relevance of the figures in line 2). 3. Lambda programme demand diagnosis (see Table 15 for the relevance of the figures in line 3). 4. Lambda programme demand display (see Table 15 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Not relevant. 1. 2. 3. 4. Lambda control (bank 1). Lambda control (bank 2). Charcoal filter valve duty cycle. Throttle valve angle (at idling speed = 0, at full load = greater than 95%).

10

1. Assigned Lambda value (the difference between this reading and the field 2 below must always be < 8%). 2. Assigned Lambda value (the difference between this reading and the field 1 above must always be < 8%). 3. Lambda probe 1 voltage (bank 1) - Reading must fluctuate, occasionally going beyond 0.3 to 0.6V range. 4. Lambda probe 1 voltage (bank 2) - Reading must fluctuate, occasionally going beyond 0.3 to 0.6V range. 1. Ignition timing - without knock control and without digital idling speed stabilisation. - (with idling switch open - engine speed raised). 2. Ignition timing - with knock control and with digital idling speed stabilisation. - (average of all four cylinders). 3. Ignition timing intervention (for digital idling speed stabilisation). 4. Idling switch function (0 = open, 1 = closed). 1. Momentary engine speed. 2. Engine load. 3. Ignition timing map switch-over - selected by the knock control function under a variety of conditions including poor fuel quality or abnormal engine noises (loose ancillaries or other engine damage). 4. Ignition timing retardation of knock control - active from a engine load of greater than 40% - average of all cylinders. 1. Ignition timing map switch-over - selected by the knock control function under a variety of conditions including poor fuel quality or abnormal engine noises (loose ancillaries or other engine damage). 2. Ignition timing retard of knock control (cylinder 1). 3. Ignition timing retard of knock control (cylinder 2). 4. Ignition timing retard of knock control (cylinder 3).

11

12

13

104

Manufacturer Applications
14 1. Ignition timing map switch-over - selected by the knock control function under a variety of conditions including poor fuel quality or abnormal engine noises (loose ancillaries or other engine damage). 2. Ignition timing retard of knock control (cylinder 4). 3. Ignition timing retard of knock control (cylinder 5). 4. Ignition timing retard of knock control (cylinder 6). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (momentary). Knock sensor signal for cylinder 1. Knock sensor signal for cylinder 2. Knock sensor signal for cylinder 3. Engine speed (momentary). Knock sensor signal for cylinder 4. Knock sensor signal for cylinder 5. Knock sensor signal for cylinder 6.

15

16

17

1. Timer 1 (see note below). 2. Timer 2 (see note below). 3. For vehicles up to 05/94 the display indicates EGR valve duty cycle between 0 and 100%. For vehicles 06/94 on the display indicates momentary engine load (33 to 60% for ECU suffix 'C', and 30 to 60% for ECU suffix 'E'). 4. EGR temperature. Diagnosis recognised as OK only if EGR temperature is in excess of 65C at the end of the diagnosis.

NOTE: Timer 1 end value = 2 for ECU with suffix 'C', end value = 1 for ECU with suffix 'E'. Timer 2 end value = 0 for ECU with suffix 'C', end value = 160 for ECU with suffix 'E'. If diagnostic conditions are met, the timers are incremented (count up); if these conditions are not met, the timers are decremented (count down). The timer functions operate in a different manner for the differing ECU suffix letter types, and are explained individually below. Suffix 'C' ECU For Suffix 'C' ECUs, Timer 1 is incremented by 1 as soon as Timer 2 has reached the value of 255. If the value of 255 is reached, Timer 2 jumps to 0 and begins counting up again to 255. Once the value 255 is reached, Timer 2 jumps to its end value 0 and Timer 1 to its end value of 2. Suffix 'E' ECU Timer 1 is incremented by 1 as soon as Timer 2 has reached the value 255. If the value 255 is reached, Timer 2 jumps to 0 and begins to count up to 160. 18 1. 2. 3. 4. Idle speed stabilisation valve on/off ratio. Idle speed stabilisation valve (current consumption of). Idle speed stabilisation valve (current control of). Voltage supply to ECU.

105

Manufacturer Applications
19 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine output (computed value) - momentary. Inducted air mass. Road speed - momentary. Injection time (average of all cylinders).

20 21 22

1. Display group 20 not currently assigned. 1. Display group 21 not currently assigned. 1. Torque reduction stages (see note below). 2. Ignition timing retardation - because of ASR (only if engine cold coolant temp. less than 20C). 3. Reduced engine torque. 4. Non-reduced engine torque.

NOTE: Traction control (ASR) information, computed from data supplied on wheel slip through the ABS ECU. As required of the system, the engine torque is reduced via the engine management ECU; this is achieved in differing manners according to the temperature of the engine and the degree of torque reduction required - with engine cold (coolant temperature less than 20C) small reduction (stages 1 to 5) by ignition timing retardation, large reduction (stages 6 to 12) by briefly switching off individual injectors; with a warm engine (coolant temperature in excess of 40C), all reductions are achieved by briefly switching off individual injectors. 23 1. Gearbox signal shift signal (see Note 1 below). 2. Gear recognition signal and gearshift signal (see Note 2 below). 3. Aircon compressor and HRW signal - 1st digit indicates the Aircon compressor, 2nd digit indicates the heated rear window, 0 = off, 1 = on. 4. Aircon compressor cut-out - 0 = compressor has not been switched off by the engine ECU, 1 = compressor has been switched off by the engine ECU.

NOTE 1: '01V' automatic gearboxes only - all others will always show 0. Upshift or downshift signal. With vehicle stationary, selector lever in position R = 0,selector lever in positions 2, 3, 4, D, P, or N = 1. With vehicle moving above 14 km/h, read-out of 0 indicates ignition retardation selected for downshift whilst a read-out of 1 indicates ignition retardation selected for upshift. NOTE 2: First digit indicates gear recognition signal: a read-out of 0 = selector lever in R, D, 4, 3 or 2, whilst a read-out of 1 = P or N selected. Second digit indicates ignition timing retardation status: a read-out of 0 = ignition timing retardation not active, whilst a read-out of 1 = ignition timing retardation active (these signals are very brief). '00' will always be shown for vehicles without the '01V' automatic gearbox. 99 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Coolant temperature. OFF or ON Lambda control.

106

Manufacturer Applications
Table 13 - Gearshift Inputs
Display Group 4 - Gearshift Input State - Line 4 X 0 0 1 1 X X X X 4 - Digit Code (ECM Suffix C) Always = 0 Aircon compressor (0 = off, 1 = on). Mechanical Idling switch (1 = closed, 0 = open). Always = 1 (except for auto gearbox with gear engaged which = 0). 0 5 - Digit Code (ECM Suffix E) Always = 0 Aircon compressor (0 = off, 1 = on). Mechanical Idling switch (1 = closed, 0 = open). Always = 1 (except for auto gearbox with gear engaged which = 0). Auto gearbox engine intervention (0 = not active, 1 = active). Display Groups 7 & 8 - Line 2 Part load 3 0 0 1 Part load 2 Part load 1 Idling speed

Table 14 - Lambda Programming Range

X 0 X X X

NOTE: Read-out 0 = engine speed or speed and load for this particular learning range not yet reached. Read-out 1 = engine speed or speed and load for this particular learning range has been reached. For Idling speed state, engine is to idle between 650 and 900 rpm. For part-load programming ranges, a second person will be needed to perform a road test whilst the operator observes the display. During the road test, raise the engine speed to between 1500 and 3000 rpm and produce a load by slightly depressing the brake.

107

Manufacturer Applications
Table 15 - Lambda programming demand display (and diagnosis on vehicles 06/94 on)
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8 digit block X 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 X X X X X X X Display Groups 7 & 8 Part load 3 (cylinders 4 to 6) Part load 3 (cylinders 1 to 3) Part load 2 (cylinders 4 to 6) Part load 2 (cylinders 1 to 3) Part load 1 (cylinders 4 to 6) Part load 1(cylinders 1 to 3) Idling speed (cylinders 4 to 6) Idling speed (cylinders 1 to 3)

NOTE: Read-out 0 = request for renewed learning. Read-out 1 = learning process ended for the time being. NOTE: On models 06/94 onwards, the Display Groups 7 and 8 may be structured differently to that for earlier models. Models up to 05/94 may indicate a Lambda learning value in line 2, followed by the range display (Table 14) as line 3 and the demand display as line 4: models from 06/94 have the programming range display (Table 14) as line 2, a programming demand diagnosis as line 3 followed by demand display as line 4. Demand diagnosis illustrates which programmed value was checked. If diagnosis has been performed the corresponding read-out is set to 1 regardless of whether or not the diagnosis was recognised as being OK or not, e.g. if a value of the Lambda programming diagnosis in display line 3 is set to 1, but the corresponding value of the Lambda programming demand display in display line 4 is not set to 1, this indicates that diagnosis was performed but was not recognised as being satisfactory. The Lambda programming diagnosis will reset to 0 each time the engine is started at a coolant temperature of less than 40C. Demand display illustrates which portion of the engine's operating range the programming demand is required in. The format for demand diagnosis and demand display is the same.

108

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Code: AAT and ABP
Display Group 1 Description 1. Engine speed - 750 to 800 rpm for manual gearbox equipped vehicles, and 690 to 750 rpm for automatic gearbox equipped vehicles. 2. Fuel quantity injected. 3. Piston movement sensor voltage. 4. Coolant temperature. 1. Engine speed - 750 to 800 rpm for manual gearbox equipped vehicles, and 690 to 750 rpm for automatic gearbox equipped vehicles. 2. Accelerator pedal position (0% at idle). 3. Operating state (Refer to Table 16 for the relevant figures in line 3). 4. Intake air temperature. 1. Engine speed - 750 to 800 rpm for manual gearbox equipped vehicles, and 690 to 750 rpm for automatic gearbox equipped vehicles. 2. Quality of air inducted (specified). 3. Quantity of air inducted (actual). 4. ERG valve duty cycle. 1. Engine speed - 750 to 800 rpm for manual gearbox equipped vehicles, and 690 to 750 rpm for automatic gearbox equipped vehicles. 2. Start of injection (specified). 3. Start of injection period (actual). 4. Duty cycle of start of injection valve - N108 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Starting quantity injected (stored from last start). Start of injection. Coolant temperature.

1. Road speed. 2. Brake pedal status monitoring (refer to Table 17 for the relevance of the figures in line 2). 3. Cruise control system status switch (refer to Table 18 for the relevance of the figures in line 3). 4. Cruise control operating state. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fuel temperature. Intake air temperature. Not relevant. Coolant temperature.

1. Engine speed (full throttle test in 3rd or 4th gear, engine coolant temp min. 80C). 2. Desired fuel quantity injected (full throttle test in 3rd or 4th gear, engine coolant temp min. 80C, must indicate quantity limitation above 42mg/h). 3. Fuel quantity limitation (speed) - See Note 1 below. 4. Fuel quantity limitation (induced air) - See Note 2 below.

109

Manufacturer Applications
NOTE 1: Limitation of engine output - read-out to indicate between 37 and 42mg/h for a full throttle test in 3rd or 4th gear with an engine coolant min. temp of 80C. This is limitation based upon engine speed. NOTE 2: Limitation of engine output - read-out to indicate between 35 and 45mg/h for a full throttle test in 3rd or 4th gear with an engine coolant min. temp of 80C. This is limitation based upon measured inducted air quantity. 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Fuel quantity injected (with cruise control system active). Fuel quantity limitation (with automatic gearbox, during gearshift). Emergency fuel quantity injected (based on voltage signal from modulating piston movement sender). Quantity of air inducted. Atmospheric (ambient) pressure. Intake manifold (boost) pressure. Accelerator pedal position. Quantity of air inducted. Atmospheric (ambient) pressure. Intake manifold (boost) pressure. Accelerator pedal position. Not relevant. Glow period (in seconds). ECU supply voltage. Coolant temperature.

10

11

12

13

1. Quantity injected - fuel variance (between cylinder 5 and cylinder 4, for idle speed control). 2. Quantity injected - fuel variance (between cylinder 3 and cylinder 4, for idle speed control). 3. Quantity injected - fuel variance (between cylinder 1 and cylinder 4, for idle speed control). 4. Quantity injected - fuel variance (between cylinder 2 and cylinder 4, for idle speed control). 1. Display Group 14 not been assigned. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Quantity injected (actual). Fuel consumption. Desired quantity injected (controlled by driver depressing throttle).

14 15

110

Manufacturer Applications
Table 16- Operating State
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3 - digit block X 1 1 1 X X Display Group 2 Air conditioner demands higher capacity switch off air conditioner. Idling speed switch closed. Air conditioner compressor switched on.

Table 17 - Brake Pedal Status Monitoring

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3 - digit block X 1 1 1 X X Display Group 6 Clutch pedal switch (F36) - open Brake pedal switch (F47) - open Brake light switch - closed

Table 18 - Cruise Control System (CCS) Switch Status

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 6 - digit block X 1 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X X Display Group 6 - line 3 Clutch pedal switch (F36) open Brake light switch - closed Speed resumption/ acceleration Speed reduction CSS off, with speed stored CSS switched on

Engine Codes: ADP, ADR and AEB

Display Group 1 Description 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps). 2. Engine load - injection time per revolution - 1.6 to 2.4 ms (ADP engine code), 1.0 to 2.5 ms (ADR engine code), 0.5 to 1.5 ms (AEB engine code). 3. Throttle valve angle. 4. Ignition angle.

111

Manufacturer Applications
2 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40rpm). 2. Engine load - Injection time per revolution - 1.6 to 2.4 ms (ADP engine code), 1.0 to 2.5 ms (ADR engine code), 0.5 to 1.5 ms (AEB engine code). 3. Injection time - 2.0 to 3.5 ms (ADP engine code), 2.0 to 5.0 ms (ADR engine code), 1.5 to 3.0 ms (AEB engine code). 4. Air mass - 2.5 to 4.5 g/s (ADP engine code), 2.0 to 4.0 g/s (ADR engine code), 1.8 to 4.0 g/s (AEB engine code). 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40rpm). Battery voltage. Coolant temperature. Intake air temperature.

1. Throttle valve angle. 2. Idle air mass learned (without drive position of automatic gearbox selected. 0 is indicated for manual gear box equipped vehicles). 3. Idle air mass learned (with drive position of automatic gearbox selected. 0 is indicated for manual gearbox equipped vehicles). 4. Idling speed operating state (Refer to Table 19 for the relevance of the information in line 4). 1. 2. 3. 4. Road speed (read-out in steps of 10 rpm. Actual measured value). Road speed (specified). Idling speed controller. Air mass - 2.5 to 4.5 g/s (ADP engine code), 2.0 to 4.0 g/s (ADR engine code), 1.8 to 4.0 g/s (AEB engine code).

1. Engine speed - (read-out in steps of 10 rpm). - Maximum 2550 rpm. 2. Idling speed controller. 3. Lambda controller - -5 to 5% (ADP engine code), -10 to 10% (ADR and AEB engine codes). 4. Ignition angle. 1. Lambda controller. 2. Lambda probe voltage. 3. Charcoal filter valve on/off ratio (Ratio indicated at 0 means activated charcoal filter solenoid valve 1 is closed). 4. Lambda correction factor (see note below).

NOTE: With active fuel tank breather system (ACF). Read-out of 0.3 indicates very rich mixture supplied from the ACF system thus the Lambda control will reduce the quantity of fuel injected to compensate, and vice-versa for a high reading. 8 1. Injection time - 2.0 to 3.5 ms (ADP engine code), 2.0 to 5.0 ms (ADR engine code), 1.5 to 3.0 ms (AEB engine code). 2. Lambda learning value for idling - -10 to 10% (ADP and ADR engine codes), -12 to 12% (AEB engine code). 3. Lambda learning value for part throttle - -8 to 8% (ADP and ADR engine codes), -12 to 12% (AEB engine code). 4. TE active or Lambda adaption (TE active indicates that the activated charcoal filter valve is pulsed, whilst Lambda adaption means that it is constantly closed).

112

Manufacturer Applications
9 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 10rpm). - max. 2550 rpm. 2. Lambda controller - -5 to 5% (ADP engine code), -10 to 10% (ADR and AEB engine codes). 3. Lambda probe voltage 4. Lambda learning value for idling - Adaptive. -10 to 10% (ADP and ADR engine codes), -12 to 12% (AEB engine code). 1. 2. 3. 4. Charcoal filter solenoid valve (on/off ratio). Lambda correction factor (see Note 1 below) Charcoal filter charge level (see Note 2 below). Charcoal filter purging rate (see Note 3 below).

10

NOTE 1: With active fuel tank breather system (ACF). Read-out of 0.3 indicates very rich mixture supplied from the ACF system thus the Lambda control will reduce the quantity of fuel injected to compensate, and vice-versa for a high reading. NOTE 2: If -3 is displayed, Activated Charcoal Filter (ACF) contains no petrol vapour. If 30 is displayed, ACF is completely filled with petrol vapour. NOTE 3: 0 indicates that the ACF solenoid valve is closed (no supply is drawn):0.3 Indicates that 30% of inducted air comes from the ACF system. 11 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). Engine load (see Note 1 below). Road speed. Fuel consumption (see Note 2 below).

NOTE 1: Injection time per revolution. 1.6 to 2.4 ms (ADP engine code), 1.0 to 2.5 ms (ADR and AEB engine codes). Maximum engine load decreases by approximately 10% for every 1000 m above sea level; extremely hot outside temperatures likewise affect maximum engine load by up to 10%. NOTE 2: Read-out applies at idle, without ancillary loads. ADP engine code = 0.5 to 1.1 l/h, ADR and AEB engine codes = 0.5 to 1.5 l/h. When driving at full throttle, the following minimum figures must be reached:- ADP engine code at 4000 rpm = 7.0ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.1ms. ADR engine code at 4000 rpm = 7.5ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.5ms. AEB engine code at 4000 rpm = 6.5ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.0ms. 12 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (Read-out in steps of 10 rpm - Max 2550 rpm). Battery voltage. Fuel consumption (see note below). Ignition angle.

NOTE: Read-out applies at idle, without ancillary loads. ADP engine code = 0.5 to 1.1 l/h, ADR and AEB engine codes = 0.5 to 1.5 l/h. When driving at full throttle, the following minimum figures must be reached:- ADP engine code at 4000 rpm = 7.0 ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.1 ms. ADR engine code at 4000 rpm = 7.5 ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.5 ms. AEB engine code at 4000 rpm = 6.5 ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.0 ms

113

Manufacturer Applications
13 1. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder 1 (retardation by knock control, active across complete engine speed range from a minimum engine load of 3 ms). 2. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder 2 (retardation by knock control, active across complete engine speed range from a minimum engine load of 3 ms). 3. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder 3 (retardation by knock control, active across complete engine speed range from a minimum engine load of 3 ms). 4. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder 4 (retardation by knock control, active across complete engine speed range from a minimum engine load of 3 ms). 1. Engine speed (Read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 2. Engine load (injection time per revolution). 3. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder1 (retardation by knock control, active across complete engine speed range from a minimum engine load of 3 ms). 4. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder2 (retardation by knock control, active across complete engine speed range from a minimum engine load of 3 ms). 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 2. Engine load (injection time per revolution). 3. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder 3 (retardation by knock control, active across complete engine speed range from a minimum engine load of 3 ms). 4. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder 4 (retardation by knock control, active across complete engine speed range from a minimum engine load of 3 ms). 1. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 1 (at idle; at high engine speeds, the signal voltage may achieve values up to 5.1 V). 2. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 2 (at idle; at high engine speeds, the signal voltage may achieve values up to 5.1 V). 3. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 3 (at idle; at high engine speeds, the signal voltage may achieve values up to 5.1 V). 4. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 4 (at idle; at high engine speeds, the signal voltage may achieve values up to 5.1 V). 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm. Specified as 820 to 900 rpm for ADP engine code). 2. Engine load (injection time per revolution. Specified as 1.0 to 2.5 ms for ADP engine code). 3. Read out dependent of engine code (see note below). 4. Ignition angle (specified at 12 CA for ADP engine).

14

15

16

17

NOTE: Distributor basic setting, for engine code ADP only:- the Hall sender signal position is set by turning the distributor, whilst the Modernity unit can process the signal within the range specified - maintain a range of -3 to 3 CA when setting. Energy balance for Cat heating, for engine code ADR only:- for rapid heating of the catalytic converter (when operating temp. is reached the energy balance will read 1or above).

114

Manufacturer Applications
18 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 2. Engine load (injection time per revolution - engine load without altitude correction). 3. Engine load (Ignition time per revolution - engine load with altitude correction). 4. Altitude correction factor (see note below).

NOTE: For engine code AEB only, this field will always indicate 0 as the system altitude correction is taken directly from the altitude sender, however, meteorological conditions may alter results significantly. 19 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 2. Engine load (injection time per revolution). 3. Ignition angle retardation (retardation signal may not always be recognised because it is so brief). 4. Ignition angle. 1. Engine speed. Read-out in steps of 10 rpm (max 2550 rpm). 2. Selector level position (Automatic gearbox equipped vehicles, with Neutral or Drive selected. Manual gearbox equipped vehicles always display Drive position ON). 3. Air conditioner type. - High or low heating/cooling capacity - on models without aircon, A/C High is always displayed when the heated rear screen is on. 4. Air conditioner compressor status (compressor OFF is always displayed on vehicles fitted with aircon). 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). Engine load (injection time per revolution). Coolant temperature (see note below). Lambda control status (when Lambda control is switched OFF, the engine runs under map control).

20

21

NOTE: At a starting temperature below 5C, the Lambda control is not activated until coolant temperature reaches 5C; above 5C Lambda control is not activated until signal voltage is recognised. 22 23 1. This display group is not relevant. 1. Throttle operating conditions - when the first figure in the display is 1, this indicates engine speed in steps of 40 rpm. Refer to Table 20 for the relevance of the figures in line 1. 2. Throttle valve positioner min. stop. 3. Emergency throttle valve positioner stop. 4. Throttle valve positioner max. stop. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). Engine load (injection time per revolution). Ignition angle. Ignition angle retardation (see note below).

24

115

Manufacturer Applications
NOTE: Total of ignition angle retardation under knock control, cylinders 1 to 4. On engines with the code AEB, the turbo boost pressure is also reduced from a position of total ignition angle retardation of approx. 24 CA but retarding the ignition angle by 3 across all four cylinders has the same effect as retarding the ignition angle by 12 at only one cylinder. 25 (This engine group should be disregarded for engine code AEB) 1. Specified load without correction - this Display Group only relevant to engine code AEB. 2. Specified load after correction (see Note 1 below). 3. Actual load - if the actual load differs from the specified load after correction by more than 0.5 ms, there is a fault in the boost pressure control. 4. Boost pressure control (see Note 2 below).

NOTE 1: Injection time per revolution. Specified load reduced by conditional correction factors - total ignition retardation by knock control from 24 CA, altitude adaption (dependent on ignition map), and coolant temperature below 105C. NOTE 2: Solenoid valve on/off ratio. If the difference between actual load and specified load after correction is greater than 1ms, the boost pressure control solenoid valve is actuated with a fixed on/off ratio of 5%. 26 (This engine group should be disregarded for engine code AEB) 27 (This engine group should be disregarded for engine code AEB) 28 1. Idling speed controller - compensation for change of air mass percentage due to varying load at idling speed. 2. Idling speed air mass learned - without Drive position engaged (automatic gearbox). 3. Coolant temperature. 4. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 1. 2. 3. 4. Load reduction by knock control. Engine load after reduction. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). Boost pressure control - solenoid valve on/off ratio. If the total from engine load plus load reduction is equal to or > 8, this would indicate a fault in the air mass meter. Throttle pot. voltage Idling speed adjuster pot. voltage). Throttle valve control operating state. Throttle valve control adaption state - ADP running, ADP OK, or ADP error (ADP being the abbreviated form of adaption).

1. 2. 3. 4.

116

Manufacturer Applications
Table 19 - Idle Speed Operating State
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5 - digit block X 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X Display Group 4- line 4 Idling speed Part throttle Full throttle Overrun Enrichment (full throttle enrichment)

Table 20 - Throttle Operating Conditions - Adaption of Throttle Valve Control

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 6 - digit block X 1 0 X X X X X Display Group 23- line 1 Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40) Adjustment of throttle valve potentiometer with potentiometer for idling speed positioner not OK 1 1 Reading not relevant - ignore Learning of max. stop of throttle valve potentiometer no OK 1 Learning of min. stop of throttle valve potentiometer not OK 1 Learning of max. stop of potentiometer for idling speed positioner not OK 1 Learning of min. stop of potentiometer for idling speed positioner not OK

117

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: ABT and ABM
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda control value. Operating status (refer to Table 2 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Injection time. Battery voltage. Intake air temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Ignition angle. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Fuelling requirements operating status (refer to Table 21 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Activated charcoal valve duty cycle. Lambda control value. Mixture correction. Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit block X 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X Display Group 4 - Line 4 Acceleration enrichment Full load Part load Idling Fuel cut-off on overrun Re-test the system

Table 21 - Fuelling Requirements Operating Status

118

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: ABY
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (with all electrical loads switched off). Coolant temperature. Lambda control (after approximately one and a half minutes). Ignition angle (calculated by - J220). Engine speed. Injection time. Battery voltage. Altitude compensation signal. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Intake manifold temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Switch positions - indicated as OK if 00010 is displayed (only in idle condition). Idle switch - F60 defective if 00000 indicated. Engine speed. Idling speed stabilisation (zero point of the characteristic curve). Idling speed stabilisation (duty cycle). Switch positions - switch OK when 0000 is displayed (only with air conditioner switched off and no gear selected - automatics). Idling speed stabilisation (working range). Idling speed stabilisation (characteristic curve zero point). Idling speed stabilisation (characteristic curve control). Idling speed stabilisation (load adaption).

6 7

1. This Display Group is not relevant. 1. 2. 3. 4.

8&9

1. These display groups are not relevant

119

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: ACU
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda probe voltage. Adjustment conditions (see Table 22 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Injection time. Battery voltage. Intake air temperature.

1. Engine speed. 2. Engine load. 3. Throttle valve angle (calculated figure, dependent on throttle valve potentiometer). 4. Idling stabilisation valve opening. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load signal. Not relevant. Operating condition (see Table 22 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Duty cycle (of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve). Consumption signal. Not relevant. Learned mixture adaption value (awaiting specification). Mixture adaption constant (awaiting specification). Learned idling stabilisation value (awaiting specification). Stored value for throttle pot. during basic setting.

1. This display group is not relevant.

120

Manufacturer Applications
Table 22 - Adjustment/Operating Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit block X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X X X X Display Group 1 - Line 4 Not relevant Signal from auto. gearbox Aircon compressor on Idling switch open Lambda control fault Throttle valve opened Speed over 2300 rpm Coolant temp. below 80C Display Group 4 - Line 4 Overrun Idling Part load Full load Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant

Engine Codes: AAC for vehicles up to 02.92

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Injection period. Engine speed. Intake air temperature. Not relevant. Injection period. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Not relevant. Injection period. Engine speed. Engine load signal. Not relevant. Injection period. Engine speed. Throttle valve angle. Not relevant. Injection period.

121

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: AAC for vehicles 03.92 on
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Lambda probe voltage. Injection period. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Throttle valve angle. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Intake air temperature. Battery voltage. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Ignition timing. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Throttle valve angle. Battery voltage.

122

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: AAF for vehicles up to 09.91
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Intake manifold pressure. Coolant temperature. Injection time. Engine speed. Intake air temperature. Not relevant. Injection time. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Not relevant. Injection time. Engine speed. Intake manifold pressure. Not relevant. Injection time. Engine speed. Throttle valve potentiometer (G68). Not relevant. Injection time.

123

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: AAF for vehicles 10.91on
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Coolant temperature Engine speed. Lambda probe voltage. Injection time. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Throttle valve angle. engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Intake air temperature. Battery voltage. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Ignition timing. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Throttle valve angle. Battery voltage.

124

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: 1E
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda probe voltage (fluctuating). Adjustment conditions (see Table 23 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Injection period. Battery voltage. Intake air temperature.

1. Engine speed. 2. Engine load (25 to 38% at idling speed, with coolant temp. a minimum of 80C). 3. Throttle valve angle (with ignition on, range 0 to 86C). 4. Idling stabilisation valve opening (3 to 25% at idling, with coolant temp. a minimum of 80C) 1. Engine speed. 2. Engine load (25 to 38% at idling speed, with coolant temp. a minimum of 80C). 3. Not relevant. 4. Opening condition (see Table 23 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit block

Table 23 - Adjustment/Operating Conditions

X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X X X X Display Group 1 - Line 4 Not relevant Not relevant Aircon compressor on Not relevant Lambda control fault Lambda control fault Speed over 2500 rpm Coolant temp. below 80C Display Group 4 - Line 4 Overrun Idling Part load Full load Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant

125

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: PY
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Lambda probe signal. Injection period. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Not relevant. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Not relevant. CO potentiometer voltage. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Not relevant. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Not relevant. Not relevant. Battery voltage

126

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: 3F
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Lambda probe signal. Injection period. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Not relevant. Engine load signal. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Intake air temperature. Not relevant. Coolant temperature. Engine speed. Calculated ignition timing. Injection period. Coolant temperature. Intake air temperature. Not relevant. Battery voltage.

Engine Codes: ABZ

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Injection angle. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). Engine speed. Air mass throughput. Ignition angle. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). Battery voltage. Coolant temperature. Intake air temperature. Throttle valve angle (absolute). Throttle valve angle (learned value). Injection time. Operating state.

127

Manufacturer Applications
5 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (actual - max. 2250 rpm). Engine speed (see note below). Air mass idling speed controller. Switch positions.

NOTE: Specified. The basic 760 rpm speed specified is reduced to 600 rpm when a Drive position is engaged in an automatic gearbox, to prevent vehicle-creep. This reduction is partially cancelled if the rear screen heater or air conditioner is operating and idling speed is raised to 700 rpm. If no Drive position is engaged, the idling speed is raised to 800 rpm as a result of the air conditioner demanding a high cooling or heating capacity. Refer to Table 24 for the specified idling speed for the loading applied. 6 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (actual - max. 2250 rpm). Air mass idle speed controller (see Note 1 below). Learning value of idling speed stabilisation (see Note 2 below). Switch position.

NOTE 1: Learning process occurs in small steps each time the idling speed switch closes - blip the throttle approx. once every 10 seconds to open and close the switch. NOTE 2: Indicates the drift away from the designed average value (a new engine should have a positive value). 7 1. Air mass inducted - specified air mass calculated by the control unit engine idling. 2. Air mass inducted - actual measured air mass - engine idling. Deviations of up to 0.3 g/s that last only a short time may be ignored. 3. Current control factor - of idling speed stabilisation valve. Values above 1.2 indicate a contact resistance between the control unit and the idling speed stabilisation valve. Values which greatly differ indicate fouling or jamming of the idling speed. 4. Learning value of idling speed stabilisation. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (displayed in steps of 40 rpm). Engine load (see Note 1 below). Fuel consumption (see Note 2 below). Vehicle speed.

NOTE 1: Read-outs of 80 to 100% are reached when driving at full throttle. Note that the maximum engine load decreases by approximately 10% for each 1000 m above sea level. NOTE 2: Read-out applies to engine idling without ancillary loads (i.e. auto gearbox, aircon/heating system, alternator, power steering pump). 9 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine specified torque Engine actual torque. Ignition angle retardation - retardation occurs to smooth the gearshift jolt by reducing the torque output. No ignition angle retardation occurs below 2000 rpm.

128

Manufacturer Applications
10 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Lambda learning value - bank 1 (engine idling). Lambda learning value - bank 2 (engine idling). Lambda learning value - bank 1 (at part load). Lambda learning value - bank 2 (at part load). Lambda control value - bank 1 (engine idling). Lambda control value - bank 2 (engine idling). Lambda control value - bank 1 (see note below). Lambda control value - bank 1 (see note below).

11

NOTE: Because of the steep voltage jump between rich and lean, the control constantly fluctuates between the states 'slightly too rich' and 'slightly too lean'. 'Mixture rich' and 'mixture lean' states exist at approximately 0.2V inside the maximum and minimum limits. 12 1. 2. 3. 4. Pulse duty cycle (see Note 1 below). Filling level (of activated charcoal filter). Lambda correction (see Note 2 below). Activated charcoal filter solenoid status (see Note 3 below).

NOTE 1: Of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve 1 at idling speed. Above Idling speed the engine can process a higher quantity of fuel vapour from the ACF system, rising up to 100% under part load and full load conditions. NOTE 2: If fuel tank vent active. Once the flow of fuel vapour slows as the ACF system empties, the Lambda control enriches the mixture - by up to 18% for an empty system; Lambda control also leans off the mixture when the system initially has high fuel vapour concentrations. NOTE 3: Status of the valve. 'Active' indicates that the valve is pulsed for 6 minutes, 'adaption' indicates that the valve is constantly closed for 1 minute. 13 1. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 1 - active from engine load greater than 40%). 2. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 2 - active from engine load greater than 40%). 3. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 3 - active from engine load greater than 40%). 4. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 4 - active from engine load greater than 40%). 1. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 5 - active from engine load greater than 40%). 2. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 6 - active from engine load greater than 40%). 3. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 7 - active from engine load greater than 40%). 4. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 8 - active from engine load greater than 40%).

14

129

Manufacturer Applications
15 1. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 1 (at high engine speeds, the knock sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 2. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 2 (at high engine speeds, the knock sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 3. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 3 (at high engine speeds, the knock sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 4. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 4 (at high engine speeds, the knock sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 1. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 5 (at high engine speeds, the knock sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 2. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 6 (at high engine speeds, the knock sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 3. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 7 (at high engine speeds, the knock sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 4. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 8 (at high engine speeds, the knock sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Combustion misfire total (see note below). Flywheel ring gear-check

16

17

NOTE: Misfiring recognition occurs across the entire speed range from an engine load of 15%. The display indicates the total number of combustion misfirings that occurred in the preceding 200 crankshaft revolutions - ideal read-out = 0. 18 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Flywheel ring gear check. Correction value - ring gear segment 2 Correction value - ring gear segment 3 Correction value - ring gear segment 4 Combustion misfiring - cylinder 1 (see note below). Combustion misfiring - cylinder 2 (see note below). Combustion misfiring - cylinder 3 (see note below). Combustion misfiring - cylinder 4 (see note below).

19

NOTE: Misfiring recognition occurs across the entire speed range from an engine load of 15%. The display indicates the number of combustion misfirings that occurred in the preceding 200 crankshaft revolutions for each cylinder individually. Ideal read-out = 0. 20 1. 2. 3. 4. Combustion misfiring - cylinder 5 (see note below). Combustion misfiring - cylinder 6 (see note below). Combustion misfiring - cylinder 7 (see note below). Combustion misfiring - cylinder 8 (see note below).

NOTE: Misfiring recognition occurs across the entire speed range from an engine load of 15%. The display indicates the number of combustion misfirings that occurred in the preceding 200 crankshaft revolutions for each cylinder individually. Ideal read-out = 0. 21 1. 2. 3. 4. Selector lever position. Aircon. status. Aircon. compressor status. Torque reduction during gearshift.

130

Manufacturer Applications
22 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Coolant temperature. Intake manifold change over (change over occurs at approximately 4000 rpm if engine speed is rising, and at approximately 3700 rpm if speed is falling).

131

Manufacturer Applications
Table 24 - Applied Loading/Idle Speed
Drive position engaged
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Display Group 1

Rear screen-heater on
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes

Air conditioner on
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes

Specified idling speed

760 rpm 760 rpm 800 rpm 800 rpm 600 rpm 700 rpm 700 rpm 700 rpm

Engine Codes: AAA for vehicles 92 on

Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda factor. Injection timing. Engine speed. Injection period. Battery voltage. EGR temperature (if applicable). Engine speed Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Intake manifold temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Operating state (see the Table 25 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Engine speed. Idling stabilisation valve. Idling stabilisation valve duty cycle. Operating state (see the Table 25 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). Lambda factor Lambda adaption (idling). Lambda adaption (part load). Lambda adaption (full load).

132

Manufacturer Applications
Table 25 - Adjustment/Operating Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit block X 1 1 1 X X X X Display Group 4 Line 4 Acceleration enrichment Full load Part load Display Group 5 Line 4 Air conditioning compressor on Air conditioning on Gearbox intervention - auto. only Drive range Not relevant Not relevant

1 1

Idling Fuel cut-off on overrun Re-test the system

Engine Codes: AAA for vehicles 96 on

Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Coolant temperature. Lambda control. Ignition timing. Engine speed. Injection period. Battery voltage. EGR status. Engine speed Engine load signal. Throttle valve angle. Intake air temperature. Lambda control. Multiplicative Lambda adaption value. Additive Lambda adaption value. Tank venting adaption factor. Engine speed. Relative engine load. Vehicle speed. Not relevant. Engine speed. Idling control adaption requirement. Multiplicative learning value. Signal from aircon compressor (see Table 26 for the relevance of the figures in line 4).

133

Manufacturer Applications
Table 26- Compressor State
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 7-digit block X 1 1 X X X X X X Display Group 6 - Aircon compressor signal Air-conditioning readiness Air conditioning compressor has cut in Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (see note below). Coolant temperature. Lambda probe voltage (fluctuating). Adjustment conditions (see the Table 27 for the relevance of the figures in line 4).

Engine Codes: AEE for vehicles 96 on

Display Group 1

NOTE: The specification must be attained with the coolant temperature at a minimum of 80C, with all electrical ancillaries switched off. Specified for manual gearbox as 640 to 740 rpm (or 830 to 930 rpm for vehicles with control unit 032 906 030D), and for auto. gearbox as 750 to 850 rpm. On both auto. and manual (without control unit 032 906 030D), the idle speed is increased by the control unit if the battery voltage is too low or the air conditioner is switched on (up to 900 rpm), and after a long full throttle drive and higher temperatures (up to 960 rpm). 2 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed (see note below). Injection period. Battery voltage. Intake air temperature.

NOTE: The specification must be attained with the coolant temperature at a minimum of 80C, with all electrical ancillaries switched off. Specified for manual gearbox as 640 to 740 rpm (or 830 to 930 rpm for vehicles with control unit 032 906 030D), and for auto. gearbox as 750 to 850 rpm. On both auto. and manual (without control unit 032 906 030D), the idle speed is increased by the control unit if the battery voltage is too low or the air conditioner is switched on (up to 900 rpm), and after a long full throttle drive and higher temperatures (up to 960 rpm). 3 1. Engine speed (see note below). 2. Engine load (18 to 28% for manual gearbox, 18 to 29% for auto. gearbox). 3. Throttle valve angle. 4. Throttle valve position - 17 to 27% for manual gearbox (17 to 33% for vehicles with control unit 032 906 030D), or 17 to 34% for automatic gearbox.

134

Manufacturer Applications
NOTE: The specification must be attained with the coolant temperature at a minimum of 80C, with all electrical ancillaries switched off. Specified for manual gearbox as 640 to 740 rpm (or 830 to 930 rpm for vehicles with control unit 032 906 030D), and for auto. gearbox as 750 to 850 rpm. On both auto. and manual (without control unit 032 906 030D), the idle speed is increased by the control unit if the battery voltage is too low or the air conditioner is switched on (up to 900 rpm), and after a long full throttle drive and higher temperatures (up to 960 rpm). 4 1. Engine speed (see note below). 2. Engine load (18 to 28% for manual gearbox, 18 to 29% for auto. gearbox). 3. Speed signal. 4. Operating condition (see Table 27 for the relevance of the figures in line 4).

NOTE: The specification must be attained with the coolant temperature at a minimum of 80C, with all electrical ancillaries switched off. Specified for manual gearbox as 640 to 740 rpm (or 830 to 930 rpm for vehicles with control unit 032 906 030D), and for auto. gearbox as 750 to 850 rpm. On both auto. and manual (without control unit 032 906 030D), the idle speed is increased by the control unit if the battery voltage is too low or the air conditioner is switched on (up to 900 rpm), and after a long full throttle drive and higher temperatures (up to 960 rpm). 5 1. Engine speed. 2. Duty cycle (of activated Charcoal Filter solenoid valve 1, with coolant temperature at a minimum of 80C). 3. Not relevant. 4. Not relevant. 1. Mixture correction value (fluctuating around 128, in a limitation range of 80 to 150). 2. Not relevant. 3. Not relevant. 4. Throttle valve potentiometer (stored value of basic setting; throttle valve closed).

135

Manufacturer Applications
Table 27- Adjustment/Operating Conditions (automatic gearbox retards ignition for gear change)
Relevant when '1' or '0' is displayed in the 8-digit block X X 1 1 X X X X X X Display Group 1 - Line 4 Idling contact closed AC compressor on Display Group 4 - Line 4 Acceleration enrichment/lean mixture on deceleration Full load -

1 0

Air conditioner on Torque reduction (gearshift intervention in auto gearbox) 1 Driving stage (automatic gearbox)

Idling contact closed Overrun cut-off

136

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: ACK, ALG
Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Ignition angle. Engine speed. Engine load. Ignition duration. Intake air mass. Engine speed. ECU supply voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Intake air temperature.

4 Idling Stabilisation

1. Throttle valve angle. 2. Idling intake mass learning valve (automatic gearbox with drive selected). 3. Idling intake mass learning valve (manual gearbox in neutral automatic gearbox in P or N). 4. Operating mode (idle, part load, etc.). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Actual engine speed. Specified engine speed. Idle air mass regulating valve. Intake air mass. Engine speed. Injection duration. Bank 1 at idle - lambda learnt valve (additive) (see note below). Bank 2 at idle - lambda learnt valve (additive) (see note below).

5 Idling Stabilisation

6 Idling Stabilisation

NOTE: A negative value indicates a rich mixture, whilst a positive value indicates a lean mixture 7 Lambda Learnt Value 1. Bank 1 at part throttle - lambda learnt value (multiplicative) (see note below). 2. Bank 2 at part throttle - lambda learnt value (multiplicative) (see note below). 3. Bank 1 at idle - lambda learnt value (additive) (see note below). 4. Bank 2 at idle - lambda learnt value (additive) (see note below).

137

Manufacturer Applications
NOTE: A low value indicates that the engine is running too rich and therefore the ECU is weakening the mixture. A high value indicates that the engine is running too weak and therefore the ECU is enriching the mixture. Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine speed increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This amount is not dependent on the basic injection duration period. Multiplicative: The effects of a fault (e.g. Injector fault) will increase as engine speed increases, so a multiplicative learnt value is a proportional change to the injection duration. The change is dependent on the basic injection duration period. 8 Lambda Learnt Value 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Injection duration. Bank 1 at idle - lambda learnt value (additive) (see note below). Bank 2 at idle - lambda learnt value (additive) (see note below).

NOTE: Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine speed increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This amount is not dependent on the basic injection duration period. 9 Oxygen Sensor 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Oxygen sensor voltage - bank 1. Oxygen sensor voltage - bank 2. EVAP canister purge valve duty cycle. Lambda correction factor while fuel tank venting is active. EVAP canister purge valve duty cycle. Lambda correction factor with tank breather active. EVAP canister charge level (see Note 1 below). Fuel tank venting system purge rate (see Note 2 below).

10 Fuel Tank Breather

NOTE 1: Display = - 5: canister empty Display = 95: canister full NOTE 2: Display = 0.5: no canister vapours ingested Display = 1.5: 30% of the intake air mass drawn from the canister 11 Fuel Consumption 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Fuel consumption. Engine speed. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 3. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 3.

12 Knock Control

13 Knock Control

138

Manufacturer Applications
14 Knock Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 5. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 6. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 5. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 6. Engine speed. Engine load. Ignition timing. Total sum of ignition retardation cylinders 1 to 6. Engine speed. Knock sensor voltage - cylinder 1. Knock sensor voltage - cylinder 2. Knock sensor voltage - cylinder 3. Engine speed. Knock sensor voltage - cylinder 4. Knock sensor voltage - cylinder 5. Knock sensor voltage - cylinder 6. Engine speed. Engine load. Required engine torque. Actual engine torque. Engine speed. Automatic gearbox operating mode. A/C operating modes. A/C compressor status. Engine speed. Engine load. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda control operating mode.

15 Knock Control

16 Knock Control

17 Knock Sensors

18 Knock Sensors

19 Torque Reduction (automatic gearbox) 20 Operating Modes

21 Lambda Control

22 23 Throttle Control part adaption

1. This group is not relevant. 1. Learning requirement (for relevance of the figures in line 1 see Table 28). 2. Throttle valve positioner minimum stop. 3. Throttle valve positioner 'limp home' stop. 4. Throttle valve positioner maximum stop. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Reduction stages. Specified engine torque. Actual engine torque.

24 Traction Control

139

Manufacturer Applications
25 System Status 1. Engine speed. 2. Engine load. 3. System status (for relevance of the figures in line 1 see Table 29). 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Camshaft position - bank 1. Camshaft position - bank 2.

26 Camshaft Timing Adjustment 27 System Status and Camshaft Timing Adjustments 95

1. System status (for relevance of the figures in line 1 see Table 30). 2. 3. Camshaft position - bank 1. 4. Camshaft position - bank 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Ignition timing. Engine coolant temperature. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage. Throttle valve positioner sensor voltage. Operating mode. Adaption status. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda regulation. Lambda regulation operating mode.

98 Throttle Control part-matching 99 Lambda Regulation

140

Manufacturer Applications
Table 28 - Throttle Control Learning Requirement
Relevant when '1' or '0' is displayed in the 8-digit block X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 X 0 Display group 23 - Line 1 Not assigned Throttle valve positioner min. stop - learning process not carried out Throttle valve positioner max stop - learning process not carried out Throttle valve potentiometer min. stop - learning process not carried out Throttle valve potentiometer max stop - learning process not carried out Not assigned Throttle valve positioner to throttle valve potentiometer - balance not carried out Not assigned Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit block X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 25 - Line 3 Camshaft timing adjustment active. Intake manifold change-over active. See WSM. Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit block X X 1 1 Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Ignition angle. Engine speed. Engine load. Ignition duration. Intake air mass. X 1 Display group 27 - Line 1 Camshaft timing adjustment active. Intake manifold change-over active. See WSM.

Table 29 - Display group 25 System Status

Table 30 - Display Group 27 System Status

Engine Codes: ADR, AEB, AJL, AJP

141

Manufacturer Applications
3 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. ECU supply voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Intake air temperature.

1. Throttle valve angle. 2. Idling air mass learnt valve (automatic transmission in P or N). 3. Idling air mass learnt valve (manual transmission in neutral or automatic in drive). 4. Operating mode (idle, part load, etc.). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Actual engine speed. Specified engine speed. Idle air mass regulating valve. Intake air mass. Engine speed. Idle air mass regulating valve. Lambda regulator. Ignition angle. Lambda regulator control value. Oxygen sensor voltage. EVAP canister purge valve duty cycle. Lambda correction factor whilst tank venting is active. Injection duration. Lambda learnt value at idle (additive) (see note below). Lambda learnt value at part load (multiplicative) (see note below). Fuel tank venting operating mode.

5 Idling Stabilisation

6 Idling Stabilisation

7 Lambda Leant Values

8 Lambda Leant Values

NOTE: A low value indicates that the engine is running too rich and therefore the ECU is weakening the mixture. A high value indicates that the engine is running too weak and therefore the ECU is enriching the mixture. Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine speed increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This amount is not dependent on the basic injection duration period. Multiplicative: The effects of a fault (e.g. Injector fault) will increase as engine speed increases, so a multiplicative learnt value is a proportional change to the injection duration. The change is dependent on the basic injection duration period. 9 Lambda Leant Values 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Lambda regulator control value. Oxygen sensor voltage. Lambda learnt value at idle (additive). EVAP canister purge valve duty cycle. Lambda correction factor during active fuel tank venting. Charge level of EVAP canister (see Note 1 below). Fuel tank venting system purge rate (see Note 2 below).

10 Fuel Tank Venting

142

Manufacturer Applications
NOTE 1: Value of -3 indicates that the canister is empty, 32 indicates it is full of vapours. NOTE 2: Value of 0.0 indicates that the purge valve is closed, 0.3 indicates that 30% of the intake air mass is from the EVAP canister. 11 Fuel Consumption 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Fuel consumption. Engine speed. Battery voltage. Fuel consumption. Ignition timing. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4. Cylinder 1 knock sensor voltage. Cylinder 2 knock sensor voltage. Cylinder 3 knock sensor voltage. Cylinder 4 knock sensor voltage. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle (engine load). Altitude correction factor. Engine speed. Engine load. Ignition angle retardation. Ignition timing. Engine speed. Automatic gearbox operating mode. A/C operating mode. A/C compressor operating mode.

12 Fuel Consumption (code AJP) 13 Knock Control (code AJP) 14 Knock Control

15 Knock Control

16 Knock Control

18 Altitude adaption

19 Torque Reduction (automatic gearbox) 20O perasting Modes

143

Manufacturer Applications
21 Lambda Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda control operating mode. Learning requirement (for the relevance of this data see Table 31). Throttle valve minimum position. Throttle valve 'limp home' running position. Throttle valve maximum position. Engine speed. Engine load. Ignition timing. Sum of the cylinders 1 to 4 ignition retardation angles.

23 Adaption of throttle Valve Control part 24 Knock Control

25 Intake change-over/ camshaft adjustment (code ADR/ AJP) 25 Charge Pressure Control (AEB only) 26 Camshaft Adjustment

1. Engine operating mode. 2. Hall sensor adjustment deviation. 3. Intake manifold/camshaft adjustment operating mode (for the relevance of this data see Table 32). 4. Active camshaft adjustment angle. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Specified engine load (from accelerator pedal). Specified engine load after correction by knock control etc. Actual engine load. Charge pressure limitation valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Engine load. Intake manifold/camshaft adjustment operating mode. Active camshaft adjustment angle. Engine speed. Engine load. Ignition timing. Engine coolant temperature. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage. Throttle valve positioner potentiometer voltage. Engine operating mode. Throttle control part matching mode. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda control. Operating condition.

95

98 Matching Throttle Control part 99 Lambda Regulation

144

Manufacturer Applications
Table 31 - Throttle Control Learning Requirements
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 6-digit block X X X X X X 1 Display group 23 - Line 1 Throttle valve positioner Min. stop signal - learning process (0=Learning process OK, 1=Learning process required) Throttle valve positioner Max. stop signal - learning process (0=Learning process OK, 1=Learning process required) Learning process throttle valve potentiometer Min. stop (0=Learning process OK, 1=Learning process required) Learning process throttle valve potentiometer Max. stop (0=Learning process OK, 1=Learning process required) Not assigned Throttle valve potentiometer being balanced with throttle valve positioner (0=Balance required, 1=Balance OK) Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit block X X 1 0 Display Group 1 Injected Quantity Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Injected quantity. Modulating piston movement sensor voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Engine speed. Accelerator pedal position. Operating condition (for the relevance of this data see Table 33). Engine coolant temperature. X 1 Display group 25 - Line 3 1= Camshaft advanced 1= Long intake manifold track Not assigned

1 1

Table 32 - Intake Manifold/Camshaft Adjustment Operating Mode

Engine Codes: 1Z (03.94-on), AEY, AFN, ALE, AVG

2 Idling Speed

145

Manufacturer Applications
3 EGR System 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Specified intake air mass. Actual intake air mass. EGR valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Specified injection commencement. Actual injection commencement. Commencement-of-injection valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Specified injection commencement. Actual injection commencement. Commencement-of-injection valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Starting injection quantity. Actual commencement of injection. Engine coolant temperature.

4 Injection Commencemen t 4 Injection Commencemen t at Full Throttle (3d gear) 5 Starting Conditions

6 Switch Positions

1. Vehicle speed. 2. Brake pedal monitor (for the relevance of this data see Table 34). 3. Cruise control system (CCS) (for the relevance of this data see Table 35). 4. Cruise control system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fuel temperature. Not allocated. Intake manifold temperature. Engine coolant temperature. Engine speed. Injected quantity (from accelerator pedal position). Injection quantity limitation (torque limitation). Injection quantity limitation (smoke prevention). Engine speed. Injection quantity (Cruise control system active). Injection limitation from automatic gearbox during gear change. Modulating piston movement sensor voltage. Intake air mass. Atmospheric pressure. Intake manifold pressure. Accelerator pedal position.

7 Temperatures

8 Limitation of Injection Quantity at full throttle (3rd gear) 9 Limitation of Injection Quantity 10 Air Quantities at full throttle (3rd gear)

146

Manufacturer Applications
11 Turbo Charge Pressure Control at full throttle (3rd gear) 12 Glow Plugs 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Specified turbo charge pressure. Actual turbo charge pressure. Charge pressure control valve solenoid duty cycle (see note below).

NOTE: Engine code AEY: Throttle valve positioner duty cycle. 1. 2. 3. 4. Not allocated Pre-glow period. Supply voltage from control unit. Engine coolant temperature.

13 Idle speed smooth running control (see note below)

1. Difference in injected quantity between cylinders 4 and 3. 2. Difference in injected quantity between cylinders 2 and 3. 3. Difference in injected quantity between cylinders 1 and 3. 4.

NOTE: The injection system is equipped with an idle speed smooth running control. Any power differences between the cylinders is recognised and equalised via selective injected quantities. 16 Additional Heating (AFN >08.97) 1. Alternator loading. 2. Additional heater conditions (for the relevance of this data see Table 36). 3. Heater element activation (for the relevance of this data see Table 37). 4. Control unit voltage supply. 1. Modulating piston voltage at minimum stop. 2. Modulating piston voltage at maximum stop. 3. 4.

19 (code 1Z)

147

Manufacturer Applications
Table 33 - Group 2 Operating Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit block X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 2 - Line 3 A/C compressor switched on Idling switch closed Idle speed increased due to A/C Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit block X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 6 - Line 2 Brake light switch closed Brake pedal switch open Clutch pedal switch open Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5 & 6-digit blocks All except code ALE X X X X 1 1 1 1 Code ALE only X X X X 1 1 1 1 X X 1 1 1 1 1 Display group 6 - Line 3 CCS switched on Speed accepted Speed accepted again Brake pedal depressed Clutch pedal depressed X 1 Display group 6 - Line 3 CCS switched on Speed accepted Speed accepted again Brake pedal depressed Clutch pedal depressed

Table 34 - Group 6 Brake Pedal Monitor

Table 35 - Group 6 Cruise Control Monitor

148

Manufacturer Applications
Table 36 - Additional Heater Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Display group 16 - Line 2 Coolant temperature above 70 to 80C, or intake air temperature above 5C Alternator defective Battery voltage below 9V Engine speed below 760 rpm Engine start within the last 10 secs Coolant or Intake manifold temperature sensor defective Not assigned Not assigned Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 2-digit blocks X 1 Display Groups Description 1 Injected Quantity 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Injection quantity. Injection duration. Engine coolant temperature. X 1 Display group 16 - Line 3 Low heat output relay on High heat output relay on

Table 37 - Group 16 Heater Element Activation

Engine Codes: AFB, AKE and AKN

2 Idle Speed

1. Engine speed. 2. Accelerator pedal position. 3. Operating conditions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 38). 4. Engine coolant temperature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Specified intake air mass. Actual intake air mass. EGR valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Specified injection commencement. Actual injection commencement. Injection commencement valve duty cycle.

3 EGR System

4 Injection Commencement

149

Manufacturer Applications
4 Injection Commencement at full load 5 Starting Conditions 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Specified injection commencement. Actual injection commencement. Injection commencement valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Starting quantity. Actual commencement of injection. Engine coolant temperature.

6 Switch Positions

1. Vehicle speed. 2. Brake pedal position (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 39). 3. Cruise control system (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 40). 4. Cruise control system status (see note below).

NOTE: Vehicles without cruise control = 255, Cruise control switched off = 0, Cruise control switched on = 1 7 Temperatures 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fuel temperature. Oil temperature. Intake air temperature. Engine coolant temperature. Engine speed. Injection requirement from accelerator pedal. Injected quantity limitation (torque reduction). Injected quantity limitation (smoke prevention).

8 Injection Limitation at full load 9 Injection Limitation at full load

1. Injection requirement from accelerator pedal. 2. Injection limitation during gear change (automatic transmission). 3. Injected quantity due to engine braking effect. 4. Injection quantity limitation due to traction control. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Intake air mass. Atmospheric pressure. Intake manifold pressure. Accelerator pedal position. Engine speed. Specified turbo charge pressure. Actual turbo charge pressure. Charge pressure control valve duty cycle.

10 Air Quantities at full load

11 Turbo Charge Pressure Control 12 Glow Plugs

1. 2. Pre-glow period. 3. ECU supply voltage. 4. Engine coolant temperature.

150

Manufacturer Applications
13 Idle Speed Smooth Running Control (see note below) 1. 2. 3. 4. Injection quantity variation between cylinders 3 and 2. Injection quantity variation between cylinders 1 and 2. Not allocated Not allocated

NOTE: The injection system is equipped with an idle speed smooth running control. Any power differences between the cylinders is recognised and equalised via selective injected quantities. 14 Idle Speed Smooth Running Control (see note below) 1. 2. 3. 4. Not allocated Injection quantity variation between cylinders 6 and 2. Injection quantity variation between cylinders 4 and 2. Injection quantity variation between cylinders 5 and 2.

NOTE: The injection system is equipped with an idle speed smooth running control. Any power differences between the cylinders is recognised and equalised via selective injected quantities. 15 Fuel Consumption 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Actual injection quantity. Fuel consumption Injection quantity requirement from accelerator pedal

18 Fuel Injection Pump

1. Injection pump voltage supply. 2. Voltage supply from the ECU. 3. Injection pump status (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 41). 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Injection pump speed. Start of delivery. Metering solenoid valve activation period. Fuel temperature

19 Starting

20 Idling

1. Fuel quantity diagnosis operating conditions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 42). 2. Injection condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 43). 3. Fuel pump status. 4. Fault recognised (0 = no fault) 1. 2. 3. 4. Gearbox status (see note below). ABS status (see note below). Instrument cluster status (see note below). Air bag status (see note below).

125 Data Bus Communication

NOTE: Display = 1 when control units with active data bus are fitted

151

Manufacturer Applications
Table 38 - Group 2 Idle Speed Operating Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 2 - Line 3 A/C compressor switch on Not assigned Idle switch closed Kick down switch closed System fault recognised Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit block X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 6 - Line 2 Brake light switch closed Brake pedal switch open Clutch pedal switch open Relevant when '1' and '0' are displayed in the 6-digit blocks All except code ALE X 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 X 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Display group 6 - Line 3 CCS switched off CCS and memory switched off CCS switched on Resume speed again CCS button pressed Brake pedal depressed Clutch pedal depressed

Table 39 - Group 6 Brake Pedal Position Monitor

Table 40 - Group 6 Cruise Control System Monitor

152

Manufacturer Applications
Table 41 - Fuel Injection Pump Status
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Display group 18 - Line 3 Constant voltage supply to metering solenoid valve Metering solenoid valve defective Injection pump speed sensor defective Timing adjustment defective Commencement of injection not recognised See WSM Engine speed not recognised Data wiring defective Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit blocks X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 20 - Line 1 'Refuel' warning from instrument cluster 'Tank almost empty' signal from sender 'Tank empty' signal from sender Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 20 - Line 2 'Switch off' being prepared Not assigned Engine start prevented due to low fuel level Engine stopped after starting due to low fuel level Engine stopped - no fuel Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Injection quantity. Modulating piston movement sensor voltage. Engine coolant temperature.

Table 42 - Fuel Quantity Diagnosis Operating Conditions

Table 43 - Group 20 Injection Conditions

Engine Codes: AFF, AHU and AHH

Display Group 1 Injected Quantity

153

Manufacturer Applications
2 Idling Speed 1. Engine speed. 2. Accelerator pedal position. 3. Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 44). 4. Engine coolant temperature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Specified intake air mass. Actual intake air mass. EGR valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Specified injection commencement. Actual injection commencement. Commencement-of-injection valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Specified injection commencement. Actual injection commencement. Commencement-of-injection valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Starting injection quantity. Actual commencement of injection. Engine coolant temperature.

3 EGR System

4 Injection Commencement

4 Injection Commencement at full throttle (3rd gear) 5 Starting Conditions

6 Switch Positions

1. Vehicle speed. 2. Brake pedal monitor (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 45). 3. Cruise control system (CCS) (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 46). 4. Cruise control system (see note below). 1. Fuel temperature. 2. 3. Intake manifold pressure. 4. Engine coolant temperature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Injected quantity (from accelerator pedal). Injected quantity limitation (torque limitation). Injected quantity limitation (smoke prevention). Engine speed. Injection quantity (Cruise control system active). Injection limitation from automatic gearbox during gear change. Modulating piston movement sensor voltage.

NOTE: Vehicles with cruise control = 0/1, without cruise control = 255 7 Temperatures

8 Limitation of Injection Quantity at full throttle (3rd gear) 9 Limitation of Injection Quantity

154

Manufacturer Applications
10 Air Quantities at full throttle (3rd gear) 11 Turbo Charge Pressure Control at full throttle (3rd gear) 12 Glow Plugs 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Intake air mass. Atmospheric pressure. Intake manifold pressure. Accelerator pedal position. Engine speed. Specified charge pressure. Actual charge pressure. Turbo charge pressure control valve duty cycle.

1. 2. Pre-glow period. 3. ECU supply voltage. 4. Engine coolant temperature. 1. 2. 3. 4. Difference in injected quantity between cylinders 4 and 3. Difference in injected quantity between cylinders 2 and 3. Difference in injected quantity between cylinders 1 and 3 Difference between injection quantity between cylinders 1, 2, 4 and 3 (code AFF)

13 Idle smooth running control (see note below)

NOTE: The injection system is equipped with an idle speed smooth running control. Any power differences between the cylinders is recognised and equalised via selective injected quantities. 15 Fuel Consumption 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Actual injection quantity. Fuel consumption. Injection quantity requirement (from accelerator pedal sensor).

16 Additional Heater

1. Alternator loading. 2. Additional heater condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 47). 3. Activation of heater elements (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 48). 4. Voltage supply from control unit. 1. 2. 3. 4. Modulating piston movement sensor - stop position voltage. Modulating piston movement sensor - start position voltage. Not allocated Not allocated

19 Quantity adjuster (AHH, AHU <08.97, AFF)

155

Manufacturer Applications
Table 44 - Idling Speed Operating Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit block X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 2 - Line 3 A/C compressor switched on Idling switch closed Idle speed increased due to A/C Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit block X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 6 - Line 2 Brake light switch closed Brake pedal switch open Clutch pedal switch open Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 6 - Line 3 CCS switched on Speed accepted Speed accepted again Brake pedal depressed Clutch pedal depressed Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Display group 16 - Line 2 Coolant temperature above 70 to 80C, or intake air temperature above 5C Alternator defective Battery voltage below 9V Engine speed below 760 rpm Engine start within the last 10 secs Coolant or Intake manifold temperature sensor defective Not assigned Not assigned

Table 45 - Group 6 Brake Pedal Monitoring

Table 46 - Group 6 Cruise Control System Monitoring

Table 47 - Group 16 Additional Heater Condition

156

Manufacturer Applications
Table 48 - Group 16 Activation of Heater Elements
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 2-digit blocks X 1 Display Groups 1 Injected Quantity Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Injected quantity. Injection duration. Engine coolant temperature. X 1 Display group 16 - Line 3 Low heat output relay on High heat output relay on

Engine Codes: AJM, ATD and ATJ

2 Idle Speed

1. Engine speed. 2. Accelerator pedal position. 3. Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 49). 4. Engine coolant temperature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Specified intake air mass. Actual intake air mass. EGR valve duty cycle. Engine speed. Specified commencement of injection. Injection duration. Synchronisation angle. Engine speed. Specified commencement of injection. Injection duration. Synchronisation angle. Engine speed. Starting quantity Commencement of injection. Engine coolant temperature.

3 EGR System

4 Unit Injector Valve activation 4 Unit Injector Valve activation at full load (3rd gear) 5 Starting Conditions

6 Switch Position

1. Vehicle speed. 2. Brake/clutch pedal positions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 50). 3. Accelerator pedal position. 4. Cruise control system (CCS) (see note below).

NOTE: Vehicles with cruise control = 0/1, without cruise control = 255

157

Manufacturer Applications
7 Temperatures 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fuel temperature. Fuel cooling status Intake manifold temperature. Engine coolant temperature. Engine speed. Injected quantity. Injected quantity limitation (torque limitation). Injected quantity limitation (smoke prevention). Engine speed. Injected quantity (CCS active). Injected quantity limitation from AT gearbox during gear change. Quantity limitation. Intake air mass. Atmospheric pressure. Intake manifold pressure. Accelerator pedal position. Engine speed. Specified turbo charge pressure. Actual turbo charge pressure. Charge pressure control valve duty cycle.

8 Injected Quantity Limitation at full load (3rd gear) 9 Injected Quantity Limitation 10 Air Quantities at full load (3rd gear) 11 Turbo Charge Pressure Control at full load (3rd gear) 12 Glow Plug System

1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Glow status Pre-glow period. ECU supply voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Smooth running control injected quantity - cylinder 1. Smooth running control injected quantity - cylinder 2. Smooth running control injected quantity - cylinder 3. Smooth running control injected quantity - cylinder 4

13 Idle Smooth Running Control (see note below)

NOTE: The injection system is equipped with an idle speed smooth running control. Any power differences between the cylinders is recognised and equalised via selective injected quantities. 15 Fuel Consumption 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Actual injected quantity. Fuel consumption. Injection quantity requirement.

16 Additional Heater

1. Alternator loading. 2. Additional heater (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 51). 3. Activation of heater elements (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 52). 4. ECU supply voltage.

158

Manufacturer Applications
18 Unit injector valve status (see note below) 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Cylinder 1 injector status. Cylinder 2 injector status. Cylinder 3 injector status Cylinder 4 injector status Gearbox status. ABS status. Instrument cluster status. Airbag status. Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit block X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 2 - Line 3 A/C compressor switched on Idling switch closed Idle speed increased due to A/ C Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit block X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 6 - Line 2 Brake light switch closed Brake pedal switch open Clutch pedal switch open Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Display group 16 - Line 2 Coolant temperature above 70 to 80C, or intake air temperature above 5C Alternator defective Battery voltage below 9V Engine speed below 760 rpm Engine start within the last 10 secs Coolant or Intake manifold temperature sensor defective Not assigned Not assigned

NOTE: 0 = Unit injector OK 1 = Fault 125 Data Bus Messages

Table 49 - Group 2 Idle Speed Operating Condition

Table 50 - Group 6 Brake/Clutch Pedal Positions

Table 51 - Group 16 Additional Heater Condition

159

Manufacturer Applications
Table 52 - Group 16 Activation of Heater Elements
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 2-digit blocks X 1 X 1 Display group 16 - Line 3 Low heat output relay on High heat output relay on

160

Manufacturer Applications
Engine Codes: ANA
Display Code 1 Lambda Control Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda control (see note below) Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 53). Engine speed. Engine load. Injection duration. Intake air mass. Engine speed. Intake air mass (engine load). Throttle valve angle sensor 1. Ignition timing. Engine speed. ECU supply voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Intake air temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Operating mode (idle, part load, etc.). Engine speed Engine load. Intake air temperature. Altitude correction factor (see note below).

NOTE: Minus value indicates a weak mixture, positive value indicates a rich mixture 2 Injection Duration 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3 Ignition Timing

4 Temperature

5 Operating Mode

6 Altitude Correction

NOTE: At sea level value should be +5 to -10 1000m value should be -5 to -20 2000m value should be -10 to -30 10 Ignition 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Ignition timing.

12 Distributor Settings

1. Engine speed. 2. Engine load. 3. No. of the teeth on the crank sender wheel when the Hall sensor signal changes from - to + (see note below). 4. No. of teeth on the crank sender wheel when the Hall sensor signal changes from + to - (see note below).

161

Manufacturer Applications
NOTE: The engine speed sensor on the crankshaft transmits both the engine speed signal and a reference for crankshaft position. The reference signal is generated by a gap in the sender wheel. The Hall sensor rotor ring on the camshaft has a 180 division so that for half a camshaft revolution the window for the Hall sensor is covered, and for the other half revolution the window is exposed. To synchronise the components when starting, the ECU records the instant the Hall sensor rotor ring begins to cover the window (signal changes from - to +) and the instant the window begins to be exposed (signal changes from + to -). When the reference mark signal from the crank sensor is detected, the ECU counts the number of teeth on the crankshaft mounted sender wheel, As soon as it has counted between 26 an 30 teeth after the reference gap, the signal from the Hall sensor should change from - to +. After between 86 an 90 teeth, the Hall sensor signal should change from + to -. 14 Misfire Recognition 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Misfire total (see note below). Misfire recognition status. Cylinder 1 misfire. Cylinder 2 misfire. Cylinder 3 misfire. Misfire recognition status. Cylinder 4 misfire. Not allocated Not allocated Misfire recognition status. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4 Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4.

NOTE: This specification is only valid for 5 mins after the engine has been started. 15 Misfire Recognition

16 Misfire Recognition

20 Knock Control

22 Knock Control

23 Knock Control

30 Lambda Regulation

1. Lambda status pre-catalyst (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 54). 2. Lambda status post-catalyst (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 54) 1. 2. 3. 4. Oxygen sensor actual voltage. Oxygen sensor specified voltage. Not allocated Not allocated

31 Oxygen Sensor

162

Manufacturer Applications
32Lambda Learnt Values 1. 2. 3. 4. Lambda learnt value at idling speed (additive) (see note below). Lambda learnt value at part load (multiplicative) (see note below). Not allocated Not allocated

NOTE: A low value indicates that the engine is running too rich and therefore the ECU is weakening the mixture. A high value indicates that the engine is running too weak and therefore the ECU is enriching the mixture. Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine speed increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This amount is not dependent on the basic injection duration period. Multiplicative: The effects of a fault (e.g. Injector fault) will increase as engine speed increases, so a multiplicative learnt value is a proportional change to the injection duration. The change is dependent on the basic injection duration period. 33 Lambda Regulation 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Pre-catalyst lambda regulation. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor voltage. Not allocated Not allocated Engine speed. Catalyst temperature (see Note 1 below). Dynamic factor (see Note 2 below). Result of pre-catalyst oxygen sensor age test (see Note 2 below)

34 Lambda Regulation

NOTE 1: Calculated value from engine speed and load. NOTE 2: The dynamic factor is an Oxygen sensor ageing measurement. The ECU compares the adjustment frequency of the sensors' evaluation circuitry with a stored specification. If the value is not reached, the text 'B1-P1 n/OK' is displayed in zone 4. 41 Lambda Regulation 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor internal resistance. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor heating status. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor internal resistance. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor heating status. Engine speed. Catalyst temperature. Oxygen sensor voltage. Result of oxygen sensor test. Engine speed. Catalyst temperature. Catalyst conversion measured value. Result of catalyst conversion test. Actual engine speed. Specified engine speed. A/C operating condition. A/C compressor operating condition.

43 Post-catalyst Oxygen Sensor 46 Catalyst Diagnosis

50 Idle Speed Regulation

163

Manufacturer Applications
54 Idling Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Operating mode (idle, part load, etc.). Accelerator pedal position sensor 1. Throttle valve angle sensor 1. Engine speed. Idle speed regulator. Idle speed stabilisation learning value. Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 55). Actual engine speed. Specified engine speed. Idle speed regulator. Operating mode (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 56). Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). Throttle valve angle (sensor 2). Learning step counter (see WSM) Adaptation condition. Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). Throttle valve angle (sensor 2). Accelerator pedal position (sensor 1) Accelerator pedal position (sensor 2). Hold down the accelerator pedal. Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated

55 Idling Control

56 Idling Control

60 Electronic Throttle System 62 Electronic Throttle System 63 Kick-down Adaption

66 Cruise Control System (CCS)

1. Actual vehicle speed. 2. Brake, clutch and CCS switch positions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 57). 3. Specified vehicle speed (last value stored by CCS). 4. CCS switch position (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 58).

164

Manufacturer Applications
70 EVAP System Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. EVAP canister solenoid valve duty cycle. Lambda regulation during TVV diagnosis (see note below). Idle speed deviation during TVV diagnosis. Result of diagnosis (see note below).

NOTE: TVV = Fuel tank vent valve Negative valve = Canister full. Positive value = Canister empty. 77 Secondary Air Injection System 86 Readiness Code 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Not allocated Result of test.

1. Readiness code (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 59). 2. Not allocated 3. Not allocated 4. Not allocated 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Engine coolant temperature. Variable manifold status (see note below).

95 Variable Intake Manifold

NOTE: During rapid accelerator operation (up to 2000 rpm), the status must change from OFF to ON. 99 Lambda Regulation 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda regulator. Lambda regulator operating condition. Engine speed. Specified engine load. Actual engine load. Status. Engine speed. Specified engine load. Actual engine load. Status.

120 Traction Control

122 Automatic Transmission

165

Manufacturer Applications
Table 53 - Group 1 Operating Condition
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 1 - Line 4 Coolant temperature above 80C Speed below 2000 rpm Throttle valve closed Lambda regulation OK Idle switch closed A/C compressor switch off Not assigned No faults recognised Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit blocks X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 30 - Lines 1 & 2 Lambda regulation active Oxygen sensor operationally ready Oxygen sensor heating on Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 X 1 X 1 Display group 55 - Line 4 A/C compressor switch on Selected gear A/C system switched on Not relevant PAS pressure switch on Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 X 1 X 1 Display group 56 - Line 4 A/C compressor switch on Selected gear A/C system switched on Not relevant PAS pressure switch on

Table 54 - Group 30 Lambda Regulation

Table 55 - Group 55 Operating Conditions

Table 56 - Group 56 Idle Control Operating Mode

166

Manufacturer Applications
Table 57 - Group 66 Brake/Clutch Switch Monitor
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 66 - Line 2 Brake depressed (brake light switch) Brake depressed (brake pedal switch) Clutch depressed (AT: always 1) Cruise control system operational (CCS) Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 66 - Line 4 CCS sliding switch at off (switch locked) CCS sliding switch at off (switch unlocked) 'SET' button depressed CCS sliding switch at 'RES' Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda control (see note below). Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 60). Engine speed. Engine load. Injection duration. Intake air mass. X 0 Display group 86 - Line 1 Catalyst Catalyst heating EVAP system Secondary air system Air conditioner Oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor heating EGR system

Table 58 - Group 66 Cruise Control Switch Monitor

Table 59 - Group 86 Readiness Code

Engine Codes: ANB, APT, APU and ARG

NOTE: Minus value indicates a weak mixture, positive value indicates a rich mixture. 2 1. 2. 3. 4.

167

Manufacturer Applications
3 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Intake air mass. Throttle valve angle. Ignition timing. Engine speed. ECU supply voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Intake air temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Operating mode (idle, part load, etc.). Engine speed Engine load. Intake air temperature. Altitude correction factor. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle. Ignition timing. Engine speed. Engine load. Misfire total. Misfire recognition. Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control cylinder 3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control cylinder 4.

10 Ignition

14 Misfire Recognition (code: ANB) 22 Knock Control

23 Knock Control

30 Lambda Regulation

1. Pre-catalyst lambda regulation status (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 61). 2. Post-catalyst lambda regulation status (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 61). 3. Not allocated 4. Not allocated 1. 2. 3. 4. Lambda learnt value at idling speed (additive) (see note below). Lambda learnt value at part load (multiplicative) (see note below). Not allocated Not allocated

32 Lambda Regulation

168

Manufacturer Applications
NOTE: A low value indicates that the engine is running too rich and therefore the ECU is weakening the mixture. A high value indicates that the engine is running too weak and therefore the ECU is enriching the mixture Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine speed increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This amount is not dependent on the basic injection duration period. Multiplicative: The effects of a fault (e.g. Injector fault) will increase as engine speed increases, so a multiplicative learnt value is a proportional change to the injection duration. The change is dependent on the basic injection duration period. 33 Lambda Regulation 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Pre-catalyst lambda regulator. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor voltage. Not allocated Not allocated Engine speed. Catalyst temperature (see Note 1 below). Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor cycle duration. Result of pre-catalyst oxygen sensor age test (see Note 2 below).

34 Lambda Regulation (code: ANB)

NOTE 1: Calculated value from engine speed and load NOTE 2: The ECU compares the adjustment frequency of the sensors' evaluation circuitry with a stored specification. If the value is not reached, the text 'B1-P1 n/OK' is displayed in line 4. 37 Lambda Regulation (code ANB) 41 Oxygen sensor heating 46 Catalyst Diagnosis (code ANB) 99 Lambda Regulation Operating Conditions 50 Idle Speed Regulation 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine load. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor voltage. Pre-catalyst lambda regulation dwell period. Test result. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor heater resistance. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor heater status. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor heater resistance. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor heater status. Engine speed. Catalyst temperature. Amplitude ratio. Test result. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda regulator. Operating mode. Actual engine speed. Specified engine speed. A/C operating mode. A/C compressor status.

169

Manufacturer Applications
54 Idling Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Operating mode (idle, part load, etc.). Accelerator pedal position (sensor 1). Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). Engine speed. Idling regulator. Idling regulator learnt value. Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 62). Actual engine speed. Specified engine speed. Idling regulator. Operating mode (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 63). Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). Throttle valve angle (sensor 2). Learning step counter. Adaptation condition. Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). Throttle valve angle (sensor 2). Accelerator pedal position (sensor 1) Accelerator pedal position (sensor 2).

55 Speed Regulation

56 Speed Regulation

60 Electronic Throttle System 62 Electronic Throttle System 62 Electronic Throttle System kick-down adaption 66 Cruise Control System (CCS)

1. Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). 2. Throttle valve angle (sensor 2). 3. Accelerator pedal position. 4. 1. Actual vehicle speed. 2. Brake, clutch and CCS switch positions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 64). 3. Specified vehicle speed (last value stored by CCS). 4. Position of CCS controls switch (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 65). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. EVAP canister purge valve duty cycle. Lambda regulation deviation during tank vent valve diagnosis. Not allocated Result of test. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Secondary air injection air mass Result of test.

70 EVAP System (code ANB) 77 Secondary Air Injection System (code ANB)

170

Manufacturer Applications
91 Camshaft Adjustment (non-turbo) 95 Variable Manifold (non-turbo) 100 Readiness Code (code ANB) 114 Turbo Charge Pressure Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Operating mode of camshaft adjustment. Active camshaft adjustment angle. Engine speed. Engine load. Engine coolant temperature. Status.

1. Readiness code (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 66). 2. Engine coolant temperature. 3. Period since last engine start. 4. Diagnosis status. 1. 2. 3. 4. Specified engine load. Specified engine load after correction (see note below). Actual engine load. Charge pressure control solenoid duty cycle.

NOTE: Reduced after knock control, altitude adaption and coolant temperature regulation. 115 Turbo Charge Pressure Control 117 Turbo Charge Pressure Control 118 Turbo Charge Pressure Control 120 Traction Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Specified turbo charge pressure. Actual turbo charge pressure. Engine speed. Accelerator pedal position (sensor 1). Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). Specified turbo charge pressure. Engine speed. Intake air temperature. Turbo charge pressure control valve duty cycle. Actual turbo charge pressure. Engine speed. Specified engine load. Actual engine load. Status.

171

Manufacturer Applications
Table 60 - Group 1 Operating Condition
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 1 - Line 4 Coolant temperature above 80C Speed below 2000 rpm Throttle valve closed Lambda regulation OK Idle switch closed A/C compressor switch off Not assigned No faults recognised Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit blocks X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 30 - Lines 1 & 2 Lambda regulation active Oxygen sensor operationally ready Oxygen sensor heating on Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 X 1 X 1 Display group 55 - Line 4 A/C compressor switch on Selected gear A/C system switched on Not relevant Not relevant Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 X 1 X 1 Display group 56 - Line 4 A/C compressor switch on Selected gear A/C system switched on Not relevant Not relevant

Table 61 - Group 30 Lambda Regulation Status

Table 62 - Group 55 Speed Regulation Operating Condition

Table 63 - Group 56 Speed Regulation Operating Mode

172

Manufacturer Applications
Table 64 - Group 66 Brake/Clutch Switch Monitor
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 66 - Line 2 Brake depressed (brake light switch) Brake depressed (brake pedal switch) Clutch depressed (AT: always 1) Cruise control system operational (CCS) Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 66 - Line 4 CCS sliding switch at off (switch locked) CCS sliding switch at off (switch unlocked) 'SET' button depressed CCS sliding switch at 'RES' Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 Display group 100 - Line 1 Catalyst Catalyst heating EVAP system Secondary air system Air conditioner Oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor heating EGR system Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda regulator - Bank 1 (see note below). Lambda regulator - Bank 2 (see note below).

Table 65 - Group 66 Cruise Control Switch Monitor

Table 66 - Group 100 Readiness Code

Engine Codes: APR and AQD

Display Group 1

NOTE: Bank 1 = cylinders 1, 2 and 3 Bank 2 = cylinders 4, 5 and 6 2 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Injection duration. Intake air mass.

173

Manufacturer Applications
3 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Intake air mass. Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). Ignition timing. Engine speed. ECU supply voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Intake air temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Operating mode (idle, part load). Engine speed Engine load. Intake air temperature. Altitude correction factor. Engine speed. Engine load. Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). Ignition timing. Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control cylinder 3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control cylinder 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control cylinder 5. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control cylinder 6. Engine speed. Engine load. Engine coolant temperature. Result of knock sensor test.

10 Ignition

22 Knock Control

23 Knock Control

24 Knock Control

28 Knock Control

30 Lambda Regulation

1. Oxygen sensor status - Bank 1 (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 67). 2. Not allocated 3. Oxygen sensor status - Bank 2 (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 67). 4. Not allocated

174

Manufacturer Applications
31 Oxygen Sensor Voltage 32 Lambda Learnt Values 1. 2. 3. 4. Oxygen sensor status - Bank 1. Not allocated Oxygen sensor status - Bank 2. Not allocated.

1. Idle speed lambda learnt values - Bank 1 (additive) (see note below). 2. Part load lambda learnt values - Bank 1 (multiplicative) (see note below). 3. Idle speed lambda learnt values - Bank 2 (additive) (see note below). 4. Idle speed lambda learnt values - Bank 2 (multiplicative) (see note below).

NOTE: A low value indicates that the engine is running too rich and therefore the ECU is weakening the mixture. A high value indicates that the engine is running too weak and therefore the ECU is enriching the mixture. Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine speed increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This amount is not dependent on the basic injection duration period. Multiplicative: The effects of a fault (e.g. Injector fault) will increase as engine speed increases, so a multiplicative learnt value is a proportional change to the injection duration. The change is dependent on the basic injection duration period. 33 Lambda Regulation Values 99 Lambda Regulation 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Lambda regulation - Bank 1. Oxygen sensor voltage - Bank 1. Lambda regulation - Bank 2 Oxygen sensor voltage - Bank 2 Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda regulator. Lambda regulation operating mode. Engine speed. Specified engine speed. A/C system operating mode. A/C compressor status. Engine speed. Operating mode (idle, part load, etc.). Accelerator pedal position - sensor 1. Throttle valve angle - sensor 1. Engine speed. Idling regulator. Idle regulator learning value. Operating mode (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 68).

50 Idle Speed Regulation 54 Idle Speed Control 55 Idle Speed Stabilisation

175

Manufacturer Applications
56 Idle Speed Stabilisation 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Specified engine speed. Idle regulator. Operating mode (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 69). Throttle valve angle - sensor 1. Throttle valve angle - sensor 2. Learning step counter. Adaption condition. Engine speed. ECU supply voltage. Throttle valve angle - sensor 1. Operating mode (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 70). Throttle valve angle - sensor 1. Throttle valve angle - sensor 2. Accelerator pedal position - sensor 1. Accelerator pedal position - sensor 2. Throttle valve angle - sensor 1. Throttle valve angle - sensor 2. Accelerator pedal position. Operating mode.

60 Electronic Throttle System 61 Electronic Throttle System

62 Electronic Throttle System 63 Electronic Throttle System - kick down adaption 66 Cruise Control System (CCS)

1. Vehicle speed. 2. Brake, clutch and CCS switch positions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 71). 3. Specified road speed (last value stored by CCS). 4. Position of CCS control switch (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 72). 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Specified engine load. Measured engine load Status.

120 Traction Control System

176

Manufacturer Applications
Table 67 - Group 30 Lambda Regulation
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3-digit blocks X X 1 1 X 1 Display group 30 - Lines 1 & 2 Lambda regulation active Oxygen sensor operationally ready Oxygen sensor heating on Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 X 1 X 1 Display group 55 - Line 4 A/C compressor switch on Selected gear A/C system switched on Not relevant PAS pressure switch on Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 X 1 X 1 Display group 55 - Line 4 A/C compressor switch on Selected gear A/C system switched on Not relevant PAS pressure switch on Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5-digit blocks X X X X 1 1 X 1 X 1 Display group 55 - Line 4 A/C compressor switch on Selected gear A/C system switched on Not relevant PAS pressure switch on

Table 68 - Group 55 Idle Speed Operating Mode

Table 69 - Group 56 Idle Speed Operating Mode

Table 70 - Group 61 Electronic Throttle Operating Mode

177

Manufacturer Applications
Table 71 - Group 66 Brake/Clutch Switch Monitor
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 66 - Line 2 Brake depressed (brake light switch) Brake depressed (brake pedal switch) Clutch depressed (AT: always 1) Cruise control system operational (CCS) Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 66 - Line 4 CCS sliding switch at off (switch locked) CCS sliding switch at off (switch unlocked) 'SET' button depressed CCS sliding switch at 'RES' Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Oxygen sensor voltage. Adjustment condition for matching throttle valve (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 73). Engine speed. Intake air mass. Vehicle speed. Engine operating conditions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 74). Engine speed. Intake air mass. Throttle valve angle. Throttle valve positioner duty cycle. Engine speed. Intake air mass (engine load). Injection duration. Intake air mass. Engine speed. ECU supply voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Intake air temperature.

Table 72 - Group 66 Cruise Control Switch Monitor

Engine Codes: AHL and ARM

Display Group 1

178

Manufacturer Applications
6 Altitude Correction 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed Intake air mass. Throttle valve angle. Altitude correction factor.

7 Idling Adjustment

1. Throttle valve angle. 2. Idling control learnt value (transmission in Neutral or Park). 3. Idling control learnt value (automatic transmission drive gear selected). 4. Engine operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 75). 1. 2. 3. 4. Actual engine speed. Specified engine speed. Idling control. Intake air mass.

8 Idling Stabilisation

9 Idling Air Requirements

1. Idling control. 2. Throttle valve control part operating status (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 76). 3. Engine coolant temperature. 4. Engine speed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Lambda control. Oxygen sensor voltage. EVAP canister purge valve duty cycle. Lambda correction factor whist tank venting is active. Injection duration. Lambda learnt value at idle. Lambda learnt value at part load. Tank vent valve condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 77). Engine speed. Intake air mass (engine load). Lambda control. Oxygen sensor voltage. Engine speed. Intake air mass (engine load). Vehicle speed. Fuel consumption. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4. Engine speed. Intake air mass (engine load). Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 2.

10 Lambda Regulation and EVAP System 11 Lambda Learning Values

12 Lambda Control

13 Fuel Consumption

14 Knock Control

15 Knock Control

179

Manufacturer Applications
16 Knock Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Intake air mass (engine load). Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4. Cylinder 1 knock sensor voltage. Cylinder 2 knock sensor voltage. Cylinder 3 knock sensor voltage. Cylinder 4 knock sensor voltage. Engine speed. Intake air mass (engine load). Retardation of ignition timing for gearbox 'cut-in'. Ignition timing. Engine speed. Selector lever position (0=Neutral). A/C system (0=off). A/C compressor (0=off). Engine speed. Intake air mass (engine load). Engine coolant temperature. Lambda control operating conditions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 78).

17 Knock Control

18 Torque Reduction (automatic transmission) 19 Operating Conditions

20 Lambda Control Operating Conditions 21 Throttle Valve Control part adaption condition 22 Position of Camshaft in relation to the Crankshaft

1. Throttle valve control part operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 79). 2. Throttle valve minimum position. 3. Throttle valve 'limp home' running position. 4. Throttle valve maximum position. 1. Engine speed. 2. Intake air mass (engine load). 3. No. of teeth on the crank sender wheel when the Hall sensor signal changes from - to + (see note below). 4. No. of teeth on the crank sender wheel when the Hall sensor signal changes from + to - (see note below).

NOTE: The engine speed sensor on the crankshaft transmits both the engine speed signal and a reference for crankshaft position. The reference signal is generated by a gap in the sender wheel. The Hall sensor rotor ring on the camshaft has a 180 division so that for half a camshaft revolution the window for the Hall sensor is covered, and for the other half revolution the window is exposed. To synchronise the components when starting, the ECU records the instant the Hall sensor rotor ring begins to cover the window (signal changes from - to +) and the instant the window begins to be exposed (signal changes from + to -). When the reference mark signal from the crank sensor is detected, the ECU counts the number of teeth on the crankshaft mounted sender wheel, as soon as it has counted between 26 an 30 teeth after the reference gap, the signal from the Hall sensor should change from - to +. After between 86 an 90 teeth, the Hall sensor signal should change from + to -.

180

Manufacturer Applications
98 Matching Throttle Control part 1. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage. 2. Throttle valve positioner potentiometer voltage. 3. Throttle control part operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 80). 4. Throttle control part matching condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 81). 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda control. Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 82).

99 Lambda Regulation

Table 73 - Group 1 Adjustment Condition

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 1 - Line 4 Coolant temperature below 80C Engine running Throttle valve open Fault in lambda control Idle switch open A/C compressor switch on Signal from automatic gearbox Fault recognised Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 2 - Line 4 Full throttle Part throttle Idling Overrun Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 7 - Line 4 Full throttle Part throttle Idling Overrun

Table 74 - Group 2 Engine Operating Conditions

Table 75 - Group 7 Engine Operating Conditions

181

Manufacturer Applications
Table 76 - Group 9 Throttle Valve Operating Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 9 - Line 2 Idle switch open Battery voltage below 8V No current supply to throttle control part Fault recognised Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 X 1 Display group 11 - Line 4 Tank vent valve closed Tank vent valve minimum operating level Tank vent valve operating normally Vapour content check via tank vent valve Transition to tank vent valve closure Transition to tank vent valve minimum operating level Transition to vapour content check via tank vent valve Not assigned Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 X 1 Display group 20 - Line 4 Mixture status (1 = rich, 0 = lean) Oxygen sensor functioning Lambda control switched on Lambda control at limit Restricted operating mode Not assigned Not assigned Fault recorded during diagnosis

Table 77 - Group 11 Tank Vent Valve Condition

Table 78 - Group 20 Lambda Control Operating Conditions

182

Manufacturer Applications
Table 79 - Group 21 Throttle Valve Operating Condition
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 21 - Line 1 Idle switch open Battery voltage below 8V No current supply to throttle control part Fault recognised Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X 1 1 1 X 1 Display group 21 - Line 1 Idle switch open Battery voltage below 8V No current supply to throttle control part Fault recognised Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 2-digit blocks X 1 X 1 Display group 98 - Line 4 Throttle control part is being matched Fault recognised Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Display Group 1 Description 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine coolant temperature. Lambda control - bank 1. Lambda control - bank 2. X 1 Display group 20 - Line 4 Mixture status (1 = rich, 0 = lean) Oxygen sensor functioning Lambda control switched on Lambda control at limit Restricted operating mode Not assigned Not assigned Fault recorded during diagnosis

Table 80 - Group 98 Throttle Valve Operating Condition

Table 81 - Group 98 Throttle Valve Matching Condition

Table 82 - Group 99 Lambda Regulation Operating Conditions

Engine Codes: AGA, AJG, ALF and ALW

183

Manufacturer Applications
2 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine load. Average injection duration. Intake air mass. Engine speed. Battery voltage. Engine coolant temperature. Intake air temperature. Engine speed. Engine load. Vehicle speed. Engine operating status (part load, idle, etc.).

4 Intake Air Temperature at idle speed 5 Vehicle Speed

30 Oxygen Sensor

1. Oxygen sensor status - bank 1. 2. 3. Oxygen sensor status - bank 2. 4. Not allocated. 1. Lambda learnt value at idle speed - bank 1 (additive) (see note below). 2. Lambda learnt value at part throttle - bank 1 (multiplicative) (see note below). 3. Lambda learnt value at idle speed - bank 2 (additive) (see note below). 4. Lambda learnt value at part throttle - bank 2 (multiplicative) (see note below).

32 Lambda Learnt Values

NOTE: A low value indicates that the engine is running too rich and therefore the ECU is weakening the mixture. A high value indicates that the engine is running too weak and therefore the ECU is enriching the mixture. Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine speed increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This amount is not dependent on the basic injection duration period. Multiplicative: The effects of a fault (e.g. Injector fault) will increase as engine speed increases, so a multiplicative learnt value is a proportional change to the injection duration. The change is dependent on the basic injection duration period. 33 Lambda Regulation at idle speed 50 Signals to Engine ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Lambda control - bank 1. Oxygen sensor voltage - bank 1. Lambda control - bank 2. Oxygen sensor voltage - bank 2. Engine speed. Specified engine speed. A/C status. A/C compressor status.

184

Manufacturer Applications
54 Idle Speed Switch 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Engine speed. Engine operating condition (idle, part load, etc.). Throttle valve angle. Throttle valve positioner angle. Engine speed. Specified engine speed. Intake air mass. Operating conditions (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 83). Engine speed. Camshaft timing control status. Feedback signal for adjustment - bank 1. Feedback signal for adjustment - bank 2. Engine speed. Engine load. Phase position - bank 1. Phase position - bank 2. Engine speed. Engine load. Engine coolant temperature. Intake manifold change-over status (see note below). Throttle valve angle sensor voltage. Idle speed positioner voltage. Engine operating status (idle, part load, etc.). Adaption status. Engine speed. Specified gearbox torque. Engine torque. Ignition timing reduction status.

56

90 Camshaft Timing Control 93 Hall Senders

95 Intake Manifold Change-over

NOTE: Intake manifold change-over should occur at approximately 4500 rpm. 98 Throttle Control part adaption 122 Torque Reduction during Gearshift

185

Manufacturer Applications
Table 83 - Group 56 Operating Conditions
Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 4-digit blocks X X X X 0 0 Display group 56 - Line 4 0 = A/C compressor off 1 = A/C compressor on Gear selector position: 0 = P or N 1 = 2, 3, 4, R or D Maximum hot/cold air output Always 0

0 0

ECU Version (VAG Mode 1)

Selecting 'ECU Version' displays the following data for the selected control module: Part Number System Name Version Number Coding Extra ID

Part Number
An alphanumerical code used by VAG to identify a particular 'make' and 'model' of vehicle.

System Name
Additional identification information for the ECM in 'plain text' containing the module name and part of the version number.

Version Number
A four-digit number identifying the module software version number.

Coding
Vehicle specific module configuration.

Extra ID
Two data fields for extra identification (VIN) and immobiliser.

186

Manufacturer Applications
Actuators (VAG mode 3)
This function allows component activation (Injectors, Solenoid valves, Relays etc.) in the sequence determined by the ECM. The Technician can use this function to test the electrical circuit of available actuators or to investigate where faults lie when an actuator fails to actuate. For the Actuators function to perform appropriately the ignition must be switched on with the engine not running. If actuation is required for the ENG Electronics 1,2 or 3, the engine temperature must be at a minimum of 80C (176F) to ensure that all of the injectors are activated. For each actuator the activation process will run for approximately 1 minute unless the test process is advanced to the next actuator by pressing the tick key to accept.

Preliminary requirements
1. Ignition On, Engine not running. 2. Engine temperature at a minimum of 80C (176F). (If applicable) 3. The ECM is functioning correctly. 4. The required channel is available.

Performing Actuator test

1. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicle's diagnostic socket. 2. Select the particular system (i.e. ENG Electronics1) from the SYSTEM MENU and wait for diagnostic communication. 3. From the FUNCTIONS MENU select ' Actuators' and follow the screen prompt. 4. After the first actuator has been actuated, the actuator identification will be displayed on the OmiCheck display. 5. To activate the next actuator in the pre-determined sequence, press the key. 6. When the last actuator in the sequence is activated the OmiCheck will then display "END". 7. If the activation process is to be repeated, the engine must be started such that the ECM detects an engine speed greater than 300 rpm. NOTE: The actuator function can be performed on any ECM that has actuators associated with it. During the activation process the electric fuel pump will run continuously. For each ECM the sequence and duration of each activation is pre-determined by the ECM.

187

Manufacturer Applications
Basic Settings (VAG mode 4)
This function allows the technician to view and change base/learned values relating to ignition timing, idle speed, mixture, etc. The Basic settings function can also be used to ensure that the ECM can adapt or re-learn the engine operating conditions within a short period of time. Based on the engine code, some ECMs do not have provisions for adjustment of basic settings using a diagnostic tool. For these ECMs, the operating parameters are pre-stored in the ECM and adapt as the engine operational conditions change. If the learned values are erased the ECM will revert to the default values for each of the operating parameters, which may not match the engine current operating status. This may result in temporary poor engine performance. If the engine is operated over a long period, the ECM will re-learn and adapt to the engine. However, with the use of a diagnostic tool the ECM can be made to adapt to the engine within minutes.

Preliminary requirements
1. Vehicle stationary. Hand brake/parking brake on. 2. Engine running at idle. 3. Accelerator pedal at rest. 4. Fault memory must be erased. 5. All electrical consumers switched off. (Coolant fan must not run during basic settings). 6. Air conditioning system must be switched off. 7. Engine temperature at a minimum of 80C (176F).

After initiating basic settings

After initiating basic settings the OmiCheck will: 1. Switch off A/C compressor. 2. Switch off the EVAP canister purge regulator system. 3. Stabilise idle speed. 4. Stabilise ignition speed.

188

Manufacturer Applications
Performing basic settings
1. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicle's diagnostic socket. 2. Select 'ENG Electronics'1 from the SYSTEM MENU and wait for diagnostic communication. 3. From the FUNCTIONS MENU select 'Read DTCs' and erase any existing fault codes. 4. Return to the FUNCTIONS MENU and select 'Basic settings' and enter display group 0. Press the tick key to display the stored data values. 5. Using the accelerator pedal, increase engine speed to slightly above idle speed for 5 seconds and then allow engine to idle for 2 to 3 minutes. 6. Check the OmiCheck display to ensure that the values are within the vehicle specifications based on the engine code. If the displayed data is within the specification and the coolant fan has not run during the test, basic settings are complete. If the displayed data is out of range rectify the fault and re-start the process.

Re-Coding (VAG Mode 7)

Provided that a module can be re-coded, this mode allows for the coding of a replacement control module or changing previously stored incorrect coding. Coding is stored either as 7-bit (0000000 - 1048575) or 5-bit (00000 - 32767). New code numbers can be entered via the OmiCheck. Once OmiCheck has established a data link with a module it will evaluate the module coding. Dependent on the protocol used, KeyWord 1281, KeyWord 2000 or CAN, the module will indicate whether it can be re-coded. KeyWord 1281 protocol identification will display P-M-C and the Work Shop Code (WSC) 00000 if re-coding is not supported. KeyWord 2000 or CAN protocols will display 'Function not supported' if re-coding not possible. Where re-coding is supported, on-screen instructions are displayed to guide the user through re-coding. The OmiCheck recognizes 20 or 15 bit coding and will modify input requirements accordingly. WARNING: Before re-coding a module, record original code number in case new code number is not accepted. As an example, a instrument panel control module has a code 01402 that has the following meaning: 01 - Brake pad wear sensor - warning active 4 - UK 24 hr. clock and odometer in miles for cluster (2000+) 3 - No service interval (only for 2002+ models) 1 - Distance impulse number (k value)

189

Manufacturer Applications
Re-coding an ECM
Preliminary Requirements 1. Ignition on, engine not running 2. ECM supports re-coding 3. OmiCheck Re-coding Procedure 1. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicles data link connector. 2. From the 'Systems Menu', select relevant control module and wait for data link to be established. 3. From the 'Functions Menu', select 'Re-coding' - follow on-screen instructions. NOTE: KeyWord 1281 protocol requires 5 digits, including leading zeroes as appropriate, KeyWord 2000 and CAN protocol requires 7 digits, including leading zeroes. 4. Ensure that the correct number sequence is entered and if accepted by the module the display will indicate the new code, if code is incorrect the original code is retained and an error message is displayed. NOTE: There is no restriction on the number of attempts allowed to re-code a module. The original code is stored in the module data and is displayed by the OmiCheck on establishing a data link. WARNING: The original code can only be restored by re-entering the code following the procedure above.

Adaptation (VAG Mode 10)

This function not only allows the resetting of service intervals, but also certain values and settings in the control modules that supports it, i.e. gauge values, mixture trims, etc. Adaptation is carried out by selecting a channel number. There are three steps to changing adaptation values: 1. Read adaptation 2. Test adaptation 3. Save adaptation

Read Adaptation
Read adaptation will read and display adaptation data from a selected ECM adaptation channel. When a channel number is selected by the technician and the key has been pressed the ECM will respond with the value that is currently stored in that channel.

190

Manufacturer Applications
Test Adaptation
Test adaptation allows the newly entered adaptation value to be tested on the engine, in order to achieve the correct setting for the required running condition. When the new adaptation value is entered and the key is pressed the ECM temporarily stores the value. If a measured value block is assigned to the channel it will be displayed.

Save Adaptation
Save adaptation allows the new adaptation value to be stored in the selected channel. If the technician decides to permanently store the new adaptation value to the ECM, having pressed the key, the new value is stored in the channel and is then used by the engine.

Preliminary requirements
1. Ignition On, Engine not running. 2. The ECM is functioning correctly. 3. The required channel is available.

Performing Adaptation test

1. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicle's diagnostic socket. 2. Select the required ECM from the SYSTEM MENU (the selection should be based on the type of adaptation that needs to be performed) follow the screen prompts and wait for diagnostic communication. 3. From the FUNCTIONS MENU select 'Adaptation', then select the 'Manual Reset' option (if applicable). Enter the channel number and follow the on-screen instructions. 4. If a measured value block is assigned to the channel, by pressing the the OmiCheck will display the measured value. arrow,

5. If the technician needs to change the current value, by pressing the key the technician would be able to enter the data in a five digit format. For example, if the number 15 needs entering the technician must enter 00015 using the , and key where appropriate. 6. Having tested the new value the Technician can save the new value by pressing the key. 7. The OmiCheck will then display the new value that is stored in the selected channel. 8. If the technician needs to clear all learned values and revert back to the baseline values, channel number '0' needs to be entered when prompted. NOTE: Adaptation function should be used by Technicians who are aware of the results of changing baselines/learn values to the engine operations.

191

Manufacturer Applications
Variable Service Reset
For some models post 2000 MY, variable service reset should be used. To reset the service interval, enter 00000 into service reset channel 2 to clear the service counters. The channels 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and 45 are used on installing a new instrument pack. Old values are entered into the new instrument pack to ensure that vehicle servicing is carried out at the correct intervals.
Service Type Service Adaption Channel 2 40 41 42 43 44 45 Counter Contents Reset service counters (distance and time) Distance travelled since last service in 100s of km Time elapsed since last service in days Lower limit for distance to next inspection Upper limit for distance to next inspection Upper limit for time to next inspection Quality of engine oil Adaption Value to Reset 00000* 00000 00000 -----------------

NOTE: * This value must be entered manually. Other adaption channels will automatically reset.

Login to ECM (VAG Mode11)

Some ECMs may require a valid login code to be entered before allowing some actions such as re-coding, adaptation values, coding cruise control, A/C etc. Each vehicle control module has a unique login code that is stored in the 'Vehicle Factory Repair Manual' or can be obtained from a VAG dealer. The login code is a 5 digit number between 0 and 65535 and is entered via the OmiCheck. If the login is accepted 'Code Accepted' is displayed, if, however, the login code is incorrect the response depends upon the protocol: KeyWord 1281 - Communication between the OmiCheck and the module will be broken and the message 'Datalink error, Login lost - Please check the code entered then retry' (the control module will need to be reset by switching the ignition off and then on again). KeyWord 2000 & CAN - an error message is displayed and communications are maintained

192

Manufacturer Applications
Login to an ECM
Preliminary Requirements 1. Ignition on - engine not running 2. ECM supports login 3. OmiCheck Login Procedure 1. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicles data link connector. 2. From 'Systems Menu' select relevant ECM. 3. From 'Functions Menu' select 'Login ECM'. 4. Follow on-screen instructions and enter login code, including any leading zeroes. 5. On acceptance of the code 'Code accepted' will be displayed, if not an appropriate error message will be displayed. NOTE: There is no restriction on the number of attempts made to enter the login code, however, some ECMs may break the datalink requiring the ignition to be switched off for approximately 2 minutes before re-establishing communications.

193

Manufacturer Applications
BMW
NOTE: To switch the ignition ON procedure for vehicles fitted with a start/stop, insert the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without any foot pedals depressed). The vehicle's diagnostic connector (20-pin round connector) is always found in the engine compartment. If the vehicle is fitted with a J1962 diagnostic connector, this can usually be located in the driver's footwell behind a cover. NOTE: If the BMW vehicle under test has both the round (20 pin) diagnostic connector and the J1962 (16 pin) connector, the round connector should always be used to access information via the BMW application and the J1962 connector should be used to access data via the EOBD application (ensure the cap is fitted to the 20-pin connector). If the cap is not fitted, the J1962 connector will not function correctly.

Application Menu
Select BMW from the Main Menu. From the sub-menu select the required system e.g. EMS (Engine Management System), ABS or Airbag etc.

EMS Sub Menu

Select the applicable harness from the system menu. The application will automatically detect the ECU during which time you will see the Establishing Communications Please Wait Message. Once the ECU has been recognised, the EMS menu will be displayed.

Service Reset
Resets the oil and inspection service lights and Condition Based Service (CBS) options. Use the on screen instructions to select the reset option required, refer to Service section in the manual for more detailed instructions. NOTE: The Motronic 1.7/1.71f and 1.7rt fault listing information should be referenced when interrogating a Motronic 1.7.2 system.

Citroen and Peugeot

Particle Filter (FAP)
PSA were the first Vehicle manufacturer to introduce the Particle Emissions Filter (PEF or FAP). The purpose of the filter is to considerably reduce emissions from diesel injected engines. As well as the standard functions such as Read/Clear DTCs and Live Data there are a number of configuration functions available for the Particle Filter and the Additive

194

Manufacturer Applications
ECU. NOTE: Standard functions for the Additive ECU such as Read/Clear DTCs should be accessed from the Additive ECU option in the main PSA menu.

Marque
Citroen Citroen Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot

Vehicle
C5 C8 206 307 406 / 406 Coupe 607 807

Year range
2000 - 2005 2002 - 2005 2004 - 2005 2001 - 2005 1999 - 2004 1999 - 2005 2002 - 2005

Common Faults and Operations

There are two common situations which occur with the Particle Filter. Both will cause the Particle Filter Warning Lamp to come on or flash indicating that there is a fault with the system. Whenever the Warning Lamp comes on or starts flashing It is advisable to enter the Additive ECU diagnostic with the OmiCheck and use the Read DTCs function to find out why the light is on. It is also advisable to enter the appropriate Engine ECU diagnostic with the OmiCheck and perform a Read DTCs operation. DTCs are usually stored on both the Additive ECU and the Engine ECU when there is a fault with the filter. The descriptions of the DTCs should match. 1. Minimum Level DTC: If the DTC displayed is a Minimum Level DTC this indicates that the reservoir must be re-filled or topped up. In this case the Filter and Additive Reset function should be used (see below). 2. Filter Clogged or Filter Blocked DTC: If the DTC displayed is a Filter Clogged or Filter Blocked DTC this indicates that the filter itself has either reached the end of its life or is dirty and has not been regenerated recently. In this case the technician should perform the Regeneration function using the Engine ECU diagnostics on the OmiCheck (see below). If the Regeneration function is not successful, or the DTC is still present after a Regeneration, the filter must be replaced (using the Filter and/or Additive Reset function below). 3. In the situation where both Minimum Level and Filter Blocked or Clogged DTCs are present both the filter and the Additive should be replaced. The Filter and Additive Reset function should then be carried out (see below).

195

Manufacturer Applications
Regeneration
Regeneration is managed by the EMS system. Entry to this function must therefore be done by selecting EMS and the appropriate system. The function of Regeneration is to burn particles which have been caught in the filter in order to clean it. This is achieved by raising the temperature inside the filter to around 450C. An additive is used to reduce the natural combustion temperature of the particles to around 450C. Under normal driving conditions regeneration takes place automatically, every 400 to 500 km (250 to 300 miles). However, some driving conditions, such as urban driving, are unfavourable to automatic regeneration. In these cases it is necessary to force a Regeneration using this function. The following is recommended practice for forced Regeneration: 1. The exhaust and its direct environment MUST be clean. 2. Exhaust gas extraction devices must NOT be connected to the exhaust pipe. 3. No-one should go near the exhaust pipe during Regeneration. 4. The engine must be running and the engine coolant temperature must be above 70C for a successful regeneration to take place. 5. The fuel tank must be at least full. NOTE: The operation proceeds as follows: Start the engine Sending of the command via OmiCheck Wait 2 minutes The ECU increases engine speed to 4000 rpm with post-injection The ECU returns the engine speed to idle for 30 seconds The ECU increases engine speed to 3000 rpm to create a balance. The vehicle must be in good condition (oil level/quality, belt tension/quality) or damage may occur when the Regeneration function is executed. The OmiCheck will guide the technician through the process. The technician should perform a Clear DTCs function followed by a Read DTCs function after a Regeneration to check the validity of the process. In some cases the filter may have been damaged prior to Regeneration. A Filter Blocked or Filter Clogged DTC being present after a Regeneration indicates that the filter has reached the end of its life and must be replaced (use the Additive Reset function below for this operation). NOTE: When the technician is asked to start the engine the OmiCheck may reset depending on the state of the vehicle's battery. If this occurs the engine should be kept running and the technician should re-start the OmiCheck and re-select the

196

Manufacturer Applications
'Regeneration' option.

Filter and Additive (Reservoir) Reset

Entry to the Reset function is done via the Additive ECU option. There are two variants of the Additive ECU: 1. ADDITIF_FAP 2. ADDGO2 The OmiCheck should automatically identify which variant is fitted to the vehicle by reading the ECU part number. If the part number is unknown to the OmiCheck the technician will be asked to select the correct ECU. As a rough guide the early FAP systems use ADDITIF_FAP (1999 2002) and the later FAP systems use ADDGO2 (2002 onwards).

ADDITIF_FAP (1999 2002)

There is one option in the Reset menu which performs both a reset of the Filter and reset of the Additive (reservoir). FILTER RESET: This function is used whenever the amount of additive in the reservoir falls below the pre-determined minimum level. It can also be used when the Particle Filter itself is changed (this usually coincides with the re-fill of the reservoir). If the filter does need to be changed it should be done prior to carrying out this function and, if applicable, prior to carrying out an additive change. There are two types of additives used in these systems, DPX42 is the original additive used. A full tank of DPX42 will last for 50,000 miles. EOLYS176 is a newer additive. A full tank of EOLYS176 will last for approximately 75,000 miles. When the additive has reached the minimum level the Particle Filter Warning Lamp will start to flash on the dashboard of the vehicle informing the driver that the additive must be topped up. A fault code (DTC) is also stored on both the Engine ECU and the Additive ECU. If the Particle Filter needs to be changed the Particle Filter Warning Lamp will also start to flash on the dashboard of the vehicle

197

Manufacturer Applications
A fault code (DTC) is also stored on both the Engine ECU and the Additive ECU, usually describing the problem as Filter clogged or Filter blocked. Sometimes performing a Regeneration (see above) may unclog or unblock the filter. If it does not then the filter must be changed. This function is designed to be used AFTER the technician has changed the filter and/ or topped up the additive reservoir. Additives can be purchased from the manufacturers parts department. This function resets the 'Quantity of Additive' in the Reservoir and Filter' value stored in the Additive CM to zero. The technician must then follow the instructions precisely to enable the CM to re-learn the value. IMPORTANT: The OmiCheck instructs the technician to perform the following: 1. Switch ignition OFF. 2. Remove the diesel filler cap. 3. Wait for 10 seconds. 4. Replace the diesel filler cap. 5. Switch the engine on and run for 1 minute. 6. Switch the engine off and wait for 4 minutes. 7. Activate nothing on the vehicle during this time, especially not the key fob! 8. Switch the ignition ON. 9. Use the OmiCheck to Clear DTCs in the Additive ECU. 10. Use the OmiCheck to Clear DTCs in the Engine ECU. The sequence of events MUST be started at within 10 seconds of the OmiCheck displaying the "To complete reset do the following..." message. If it is not performed in the correct order or started within 10 seconds the vehicle will not re-learn the new Additive value correctly and the Particle Filter warning lamp will continue to flash or stay on. If this occurs the function must be re-selected on the OmiCheck and the procedure re-started.

ADDGO2 (2002 onwards)

There are two options in the Reset menu: RESERVOIR RESET: This function is used whenever the amount of additive in the reservoir falls below the pre-determined minimum level. There are two types of additive used in these systems, DPX42 is the original additive used. A full tank of DPX42 will last for 50,000 miles. EOLYS176 is a newer additive. A full tank of EOLYS176 will last for approximately 75,000 miles. When the additive has reached the minimum level the Particle Filter Warning Lamp will start to flash on the dashboard of the vehicle informing the driver that the additive must be topped up. A fault code (DTC) is also stored on both the Engine ECU and the Additive ECU.

198

Manufacturer Applications
This function is designed to be used AFTER the technician has topped up the additive reservoir. Additives can be purchased from the manufacturers parts department. This function resets the 'Quantity of Additive' in the reservoir value stored in the Additive CM to zero. The technician must then follow the instructions precisely to enable the CM to re-learn the value. IMPORTANT: The OmiCheck instructs the technician to perform the following: 1. Switch ignition OFF. 2. Remove the diesel filler cap. 3. Wait for 10 seconds. 4. Replace the diesel filler cap. 5. Switch the engine on and run for 1 minute. 6. Switch the engine off and wait for 4 minutes. 7. Activate nothing on the vehicle during this time, especially not the key fob! 8. Switch the ignition ON. 9. Use the OmiCheck to Clear DTCs in the Additive ECU. 10. Use the OmiCheck to Clear DTCs in the Engine ECU. The sequence of events MUST be started at within 10 seconds of the OmiCheck displaying the "To complete reset do the following..." message. If it is not performed in the correct order or started within 10 seconds the vehicle will not re-learn the new Additive value correctly and the Particle Filter warning lamp will continue to flash or stay on. If this occurs the function must be re-selected on the OmiCheck and the procedure re-started. FILTER RESET: This function is used when the Particle Filter itself has been changed. If the filter does need to be changed it should be done prior to carrying out this function and, if applicable, prior to carrying out an additive change. If the Particle Filter does need to be changed the Particle Filter Warning Lamp will start to flash on the dashboard of the vehicle. A fault code (DTC) is also stored on both the Engine ECU and the Additive ECU, usually describing the problem as Filter clogged or Filter blocked. Sometimes performing a Regeneration (see above) may unclog or unblock the filter. If it does not then the filter must be changed. This function is designed to be used AFTER the technician has changed the filter. This function resets the 'Quantity of Additive in the Filter' value stored in the Additive CM to zero. The technician must then follow the instructions precisely to enable the CM to re-learn the value. IMPORTANT: The OmiCheck instructs the technician to perform the following: 1. Switch ignition OFF. 2. Remove the diesel filler cap.

199

Manufacturer Applications
3. Wait for 10 seconds. 4. Replace the diesel filler cap. 5. Switch the engine on and run for 1 minute. 6. Switch the engine off and wait for 4 minutes. 7. Activate nothing on the vehicle during this time, especially not the key fob! 8. Switch the ignition ON. 9. Use the OmiCheck to Clear DTCs in the Additive ECU. 10. Use the OmiCheck to Clear DTCs in the Engine ECU. The sequence of events MUST be started at within 10 seconds of the OmiCheck displaying the "To complete reset do the following..." message. If it is not performed in the correct order or started within 10 seconds the vehicle will not re-learn the new Additive value correctly and the Particle Filter warning lamp will continue to flash or stay on. If this occurs the function must be re-selected on the OmiCheck and the procedure re-started. WARNING: The additive is harmful and should not come into contact with the technicians skin. NOTE: The additive is now sold as a kit which includes a device to insert the additive into the reservoir. Some kits contain the additive in a plastic bag which can be placed directly into the reservoir.

Additive Type
There are two different types of Additive used: DPX42 EOLYS176 (DPX10) Both have different properties, DPX42 is the original additive used by PSA. A full tank of DPX42 lasts 50,000 miles. EOLYS176 (DPX10) is an improved additive which will last for 75,000 miles. IMPORTANT: A vehicle which uses DPX42 can not be upgraded to EOLYS176 (DPX10) and vice versa. This function is used when a new Additive ECU is installed in a vehicle. The new ECU is programmed with the additive type that the vehicle uses. There are two ways to visually determine the type of Additive used. This depends on the model. For Peugeot 406, Peugeot 607, Peugeot 807, Citroen C5 and Citroen C8: Check the colour of the Additive reservoir cap. For EOLYS176 (DPX10) the colour will be Black with a green ring. For DPX42 the colour will be Black with a white ring.

200

Manufacturer Applications
For Peugeot 307 and Peugeot 206: Check the colour of the click-on connectors on the Additive reservoir and Particle filter. For EOLYS176 (DPX10) the colour will be Black with a green ring. For DPX42 the colour will be Black with a white ring. IMPORTANT: Use these two additives exclusively. The use of any other additive will cause the system to malfunction. Always use new, clean additive. There is a risk of the additive injector seizing if dirty or old additive is used. Never mix the two additives. It is impossible to differentiate visually between the two additives, as their appearance is identical. WARNING: The additive is harmful and should not come into contact with the technicians skin.

Control Unit Replacement

This function refers to the Additive ECU, and must be accessed via the Additive ECU option. When a new Additive ECU is installed in a vehicle it must be programmed with the current quantity of additive in the reservoir. Before using this function ensure that: 1. You know the quantity of additive present in the reservoir. You can do this by reading the value from the old Additive ECU while it is still installed (using Live Data Quantity Of Additive reading). If you have already removed the old ECU you can obtain the value by selecting the correct EMS system fitted to the vehicle and reading the value from Live Data. 2. The new Additive ECU has been installed. The technician will be asked to input the Quantity Of Additive value which will then be written to the new ECU.

201

Manufacturer Applications
Inter-changeability
As stated previously it is not possible to upgrade a vehicle which uses additive type DPX42 to EOLYS176 (DPX10). It is possible however to install an additive ECU with Additive Type mapping DPX42 or EOLYS176 (DPX10) in order to replace an ECU with mapping DPX42 is possible on condition that the following operations are carried out: 1. Follow the process for Control Unit Replacement above. 2. Use the Additive Type menu option to set the additive type to DPX42. When installing an additive ECU with Additive Type mapping EOLYS176 (DPX10) in order to replace an ECU with mapping EOLYS176 (DPX10) the following operations must be carried out: 1. Follow the process for Control Unit Replacement above. 2. Use the Additive Type menu option to set the additive type to EOLYS176.Use the Additive Type menu option to set the additive type to EOLYS176.

Reset Adaptions
The purpose of the Reset Adaptions function is to reset the base values stored in the CM's memory to a zero state. These base values vary according to the age of the engine and the purpose of them is to maintain a perfectly adjusted engine system. After a reset the CM will re-learn the values, either automatically or by the technician performing a number of steps. The function should be used when important components have been replaced. If the base values are not reset the engine will experience stalling and hesitation problems. The process for Reset Adaptions varies from CM to CM. The technician may have to go through several steps to successfully complete the reset and re-learn procedure. On systems which require a diagnostic command the OmiCheck will attempt to guide the technician through these steps, but due to battery voltage dips during engine cranking the OmiCheck may reset before a procedure has been completed. Below is a guide for the technician detailing the procedures for each individual CM.

202

Manufacturer Applications
Bosch EDC16
This function is used when one of the following parts have been replaced: EGR Valve Butterfly double doser (EGR Butterfly + Intake air Heater Butterfly) assembly Replacement of the engine management CM Procedure: 1. Before carrying out this command the following conditions must be met: Engine off for 10 minutes Engine cold 2. OmiCheck sends the command to reset.

Bosch MP7.2 / Bosch MP7.3

This is a manual procedure. There is no need to plug the OmiCheck in to perform the initialisation. After the following operations the injection CM loses it's base values: Disconnection or replacement of the CM Disconnection of the battery. Down-loading of the control unit. Re-configuration of the CM The base values relate to the following components: Oxygen Sensor Idle Regulation Stepper Motor Throttle Potentiometer Knock Sensor Procedure: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Turn on the ignition for 10 seconds (without starting engine, ignition position II). 3. Start the engine (if the engine stalls start the operation again). 4. Carry out a road test of at least 3 miles. 5. Switch off the ignition. 6. Switch on the ignition (position II). 7. Read the fault codes and clear any codes present.

203

Manufacturer Applications
Bosch M7.4.4
This procedure must be carried out when one of the following components is replaced: Injector(s) Fuel Pump Procedure: 1. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 2. Switch ignition off for at least 20 seconds. 3. Start the engine and run at idle until the fans cut-in (Air conditioning must be off).

Bosch ME7.4.4 / Magneti Marelli 5NP

This procedure must be carried out when one of the following components is replaced: Injector(s) Fuel Pump Procedure: 1. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 2. Motorised Throttle Learning. Switch off the ignition Turn on the ignition for at least 10 seconds. Do not press the throttle during these 10 seconds. 3. Accelerator Pedal Position Learning. Press the accelerator pedal fully Switch off the ignition for 20 seconds. Do not release the accelerator pedal during these 10 seconds

204

Manufacturer Applications
Bosch ME7.4.6
This procedure must be carried out when one of the following components is replaced. Injector(s) Fuel Pump Procedure: 1. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 2. Throttle Learning: Ensure engine coolant temperature is between 5C and 100C Ensure Air Temperature is higher than 5C Do not press the accelerator pedal Switch on the ignition, wait for 30 seconds Switch off the ignition, wait for 30 seconds 3. Accelerator Pedal Position Learning: Switch on the ignition and press the accelerator down fully Return to the foot-off position Start the engine without accelerating 4. Engine Mixture Learning: This must be carried out with the engine warm (above 80C) Undertake an urban drive of 5km 5. Engine Ageing Learning: Start the engine and run at idle with the engine warm (above 80C) for at least 5 minutes

Sagem S2000 / Sagem S2000 PM1 / Sirius 81

Procedure: 1. Switch the ignition off and on. 2. OmiCheck sends the command to reset.

205

Manufacturer Applications
Magneti Marelli 48P
Procedure: 1. Switch the ignition off and on. 2. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 3. Ensure ignition on and engine stopped. 4. Ensure accelerator pedal is not pressed. 5. Wait for 5 seconds. 6. Press the accelerator pedal fully. 7. Wait for 5 seconds. 8. Release the accelerator pedal.

Magneti Marelli 4MP2 Engine Code RFN (2.0i)

Procedure: IMPORTANT: Do not start the engine for 10 minutes before carrying out this operation. The engine coolant temperature must be below 30C The air conditioning must be set to off 1. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 2. Switch off the ignition to allow the CM to reset. 3. Wait for 15 seconds. 4. Switch on the ignition and listen for the EGR Valve clicking. 5. Wait for 15 seconds. 6. If the EGR Valve does not click the procedure must be restarted. 7. Turn the starter motor over in order to turn the engine flywheel. 8. Switch off the ignition to store the new values. 9. Wait for 12 minutes while the CM powers down. 10. Switch on the ignition. 11. Wait for 15 seconds. 12. Start the engine. 13. Run the engine at idle until the fans cut-in (Air conditioning must be off). 14. Before returning the vehicle to the customer a test drive should be undertaken during which time an injection cut-off should be triggered. This is achieved by driving the vehicle in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear and sharply releasing the accelerator pedal without braking.

206

Manufacturer Applications
Magneti Marelli 4MP2 Engine Code 3FZ (2.2i)
Procedure: 1. Switch the ignition off then on. 2. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 3. Switch the ignition off then on again. 4. Wait for 10 seconds. 5. Start the engine. 6. Run the engine at idle until the fans cut-in (Air conditioning must be off). 7. Switch off the ignition to store the new values. 8. Wait for 12 minutes while the CM powers down 9. Switch on the ignition. 10. Wait for 15 seconds 11. Start the engine. 12. Before returning the vehicle to the customer a test drive should be undertaken during which time an injection cut-off should be triggered. This is achieved by driving the vehicle in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear and sharply releasing the accelerator pedal without braking.

Magneti Marelli 6LP Engine Code RFN (2.0i)

Procedure: IMPORTANT: Do not start the engine for 10 minutes before carrying out this operation. The engine coolant temperature must be below 30C The air conditioning must be set to off 1. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 2. Switch off the ignition to allow the CM to reset. 3. Wait for 15 seconds. 4. Switch on the ignition and listen for the EGR Valve clicking. 5. Wait for 15 seconds. 6. If the EGR Valve does not click the procedure must be restarted. 7. Switch off the ignition to store the new values. 8. Wait for 15 minutes while the CM powers down. 9. Switch on the ignition. 10. Wait for 15 seconds. 11. Start the engine. 12. Run the engine at idle until the fans cut-in (Air conditioning must be off).

207

Manufacturer Applications
13. Before returning the vehicle to the customer a test drive should be undertaken during which time an injection cut-off should be triggered. This is achieved by driving the vehicle in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear and sharply releasing the accelerator pedal without braking.

Magneti Marelli 6LP Engine Codes KFU / RFK / 3FZ

Procedure: IMPORTANT: Do not start the engine for 10 minutes before carrying out this operation The engine coolant temperature must be below 30C The air conditioning must be set to 1. Switch the ignition off then on. 2. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 3. Switch the ignition off then on again. 4. Wait for 10 seconds. 5. Start the engine. 6. Run the engine at idle until the fans cut-in (Air conditioning must be off). 7. Switch off the ignition to store the new values. 8. Wait for 12 minutes while the CM powers down. 9. Switch on the ignition. 10. Wait for 15 seconds 11. Start the engine. 12. Before returning the vehicle to the customer a test drive should be undertaken during which time an injection cut-off should be triggered. This is achieved by driving the vehicle in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear and sharply releasing the accelerator pedal without braking.

208

Manufacturer Applications
Injector Programming
This function is available on the Bosch EDC15C7 Diesel Injection system fitted to the following vehicles: Marque
Citroen Citroen Citroen Citroen Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot

Model
Relay/Jumper Relay/Jumper Relay/Jumper Relay/Jumper Boxer Boxer Boxer

Engine Size
2.0D 2.2D 2.8D 2.8D 2.0D 2.2D 2.8D

Engine Code
RHV 4HY 8140.63 8140.43S RHV 4HY 8140.43S

The purpose of this function is to enable the technician to replace a faulty injector, or injectors, and program in the value of the new injector to the Diesel Control Unit. It may also be used when a new Control Unit has been installed and the technician is required to program it with the values of the injectors fitted. This method gives each injector a classification of 1, 2 or 3. The classification relates to the operating conditions of the injector. The control unit stores the classification of the injectors fitted and adjusts the treatment of each injector depending on the classification. The purpose of this is to improve performance and emissions. The values stored in the control unit and the values of the new injector(s) must match. If they do not the DTC P1301 will be present on the control unit and the MIL will flash. On this system the classification of each injector should always be the same. For example they could all be classification 2 or they could all be classification 3, but if Injector 1 is classification 2 and Injector 2 is classification 3 this will cause a DTC to be stored and the MIL to flash.

209

Manufacturer Applications
Fiat, Alfa and Lancia
Reset Adaptions
The purpose of the Reset Adaptions function is to reset the base values stored in the CM's memory to the factory default state. These base values vary according to the age of the engine and the purpose of them is to maintain a perfectly adjusted engine system. After a reset the CM will re-learn the values automatically. The function should be used when important components have been replaced. If the base values are not reset the engine will experience stalling and hesitation problems. The technician will be guided through the process by the OmiCheck.

Particle Filter Functions

NOTE: For vehicles which are PSA based (see list below) please refer to the Particle Filter (FAP) section under Peugeot and Citroen: Marque
Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Lancia Lancia Lancia

Model
Ulysse '02 Ulysse '02 Ulysse '05 Ulysse '05 Phedra Phedra '05 Phedra '05

MY
2002 - 2005 2002 - 2005 2005 2005 2002 - 2005 2005 2005 -

These functions relate to Fiat / Alfa / Lancia Particle Filter which went into production in 2005.

210

Manufacturer Applications
The functions are used on the Engine Management systems Bosch EDC16C39 CF4 EOBD and Magneti Marelli 6F3 EOBD, fitted to the following vehicles: Marque
Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Fiat Fiat Fiat

Model
Doblo Idea Palio RST Panda 159 159 159 Croma 05 Croma 05 Croma 05

Engine Size
1.3 JTD 1.3 JTD 1.3 JTD 03 1.3 JTD 1.9 MJET 16V 1.9 MJET 8V 2.4 MJET 1.9 MJET 16V 1.9 MJET 8V MJET 20V

NOTE: Some early builds of these vehicles may not have a Particle Filter fitted. The OmiCheck will automatically identify whether a Particle Filter is not present and omit these functions from the function menu.

Filter Regeneration
The function of regeneration is to burn particles which have been caught in the filter in order to clean it. This is achieved by raising the temperature inside the filter to around 450C. An additive is used to reduce the natural combustion temperature of the particles to around 450C. Under normal driving conditions regeneration takes place automatically, every 400 to 500 km (250 to 300 miles). However, some driving conditions, such as urban driving, are unfavourable to automatic regeneration. In these cases it is necessary to force a regeneration using this function. When a forced regeneration is required the Particle Filter Warning Lamp will be illuminated. On some occasions the filter may also become clogged. When this occurs the engine management ECU will store a fault code (DTC) of P1206 or P2002. Performing a regeneration will rectify this (the ECUs fault memory is automatically erased during the process). The following is recommended practice for forced regeneration: 1. The exhaust and its direct environment MUST be clean. 2. Exhaust gas extraction devices must NOT be connected to the exhaust pipe. 3. No-one should go near the exhaust pipe during regeneration.

211

Manufacturer Applications
4. The engine must be running and the engine coolant temperature must be above 70C for a successful regeneration to take place. 5. The fuel tank must be at least full. The OmiCheck will guide the technician through the process. NOTE: When the technician is asked to start the engine the OmiCheck may reset depending on the state of vehicles battery. If this occurs the engine should be kept running and the technician should re-start the OmiCheck and re-select the Regeneration option.

Filter Replacement
This procedure must be performed AFTER the particle filter has been replaced. Parameters stored in the ECU relating to the condition and lifetime of the particle filter, are reset by this function. After initialising the parameters in the ECU the regeneration process detailed above is performed. For this reason all of the recommended practice points in the above section are also applicable to this function. The OmiCheck will guide the technician through the process. NOTE: When the technician is asked to start the engine the OmiCheck may reset depending on the state of vehicles battery. If this occurs the engine should be kept running and the technician should re-start the OmiCheck and re-select the Regeneration option.

Oil Change
This procedure must be performed AFTER an engine oil change has taken place. Parameters stored in the ECU relating to the condition and lifetime of the Oil, are reset by this function. The OmiCheck will guide the technician through the process.

Pre-catalyser Replacement
This procedure must be performed AFTER the pre-catalyser has been replaced. Parameters stored in the ECU relating to the condition and ageing of the pre-catalyser, are reset by this function. The OmiCheck will guide the technician through the process.

Differential Pressure Sensor Replacement

This procedure must be performed AFTER the differential pressure sensor has been replaced. Parameters stored in the ECU relating to the pressure difference are reset by this function. The OmiCheck will guide the technician through the process.

212

Manufacturer Applications
Injector Programming
The purpose of this function is to enable the technician to replace a faulty injector, or injectors, and program in the value of the new injector to the Diesel Control Unit. It may also be used when a new Control Unit has been installed and the technician is required to program it with the values of the injectors fitted. The function is available on all Diesel Engine Management Systems from 2002 onwards. There are two different methods for Injector Programming on FAL: The early method gives each injector a classification of 1, 2 or 3. The classification relates to the operating conditions of the injector. The control unit stores the classification of the injectors fitted and adjusts the treatment of each injector depending on the classification. The purpose of this is to improve performance and emissions. The OmiCheck has the ability to read out the current classification of the injectors and program in the new classification. The newer method uses 9 digit alpha-numeric injector codes. These codes are stamped on the casing of each individual injector and held electronically in the control unit. The code is a result of calibration results and the results of tests ran on the injector at the time of production. This is an enhancement of the above method designed to combine the injector's structural characteristics with the control module's software and improve performance and emissions to a greater extent. This method is used on the remaining diesel systems. The OmiCheck has the ability to read out the current injector codes and program in new injector codes. In both cases the values stored in the control unit and the values of the new injector(s) must match. If they do not the DTC P1301 will be present on the control unit and the MIL will flash. NOTE: On Bosch EDC15 CF3 (2.0 / 2.3 / 2.8) systems, fitted to the Fiat Ducato, the classification of all injectors should always be the same. For example they could all be classification 2 or they could all be classification 3, but if Injector 1 is classification 2 and Injector 2 is classification 3 this will cause a DTC to be stored and the MIL to flash. The function is still invaluable because when a new injector is fitted (or a control unit replaced) the control unit must be programmed, via this function, with the injector class 2 value.

Service Reset Alfa Romeo Vehicles (UK only)

For Alfa Romeo vehicles with the Mannesman Dashboard (147 and GT) there is a problem with the Dashboard which causes the Number of miles to Service value to be set to zero when a Service Reset is performed using the OmiCheck.

213

Manufacturer Applications
When the Service Reset is performed the Dashboard stores the current mileage (or kilometre) value, read from the Odometer, in order to calculate when the next service is required. However, when the Odometer is shown in miles the calculation for the distance to the next service fails. This results in distance to the next service being displayed as zero and the Service Reset fails to be completed. To reset the Service Interval the following procedure must be performed: 1. Switch the Ignition ON. 2. Press the [MODE] button on the dashboard to enter the dashboard functions menu. 3. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the UNITS option and press [MODE] to select. 4. Use the [MODE], [+] and [-] buttons to set the units to Kilometres. All other settings should be left unchanged. 5. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the END MENU option and press [MODE] to exit the functions menu. 6. Plug the OmiCheck into the Diagnostic Socket (using the 16-pin FAL LS CAN harness) and perform a Service Reset by selecting Service, Alfa Romeo, Mannesman then Service Reset. 7. Disconnect the OmiCheck, leaving the ignition on. 8. Press the [MODE] button on the dashboard to enter the dashboard functions menu. 9. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the UNITS option and press [MODE] to select. 10. Use the [MODE], [+] and [-] buttons to set the units back to Miles. All other settings should be left unchanged. 11. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the SERVICE option and press [MODE] to select. 12. Number of Miles to Service should now read approximately 12500 miles. 13. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the END MENU option and press [MODE] to exit the functions menu. 14. Switch Ignition OFF. This procedure is necessary to ensure that the value read from the Odometer by the dashboard, when a Service Reset is performed by the OmiCheck, is in Kilometres. The Dashboard can then calculate the Number of Miles to Service correctly. On the European Continent this procedure is not necessary as all dashboards are in Kilometres.

214

Manufacturer Applications
Ford
Introduction
This application enables the diagnosis of all Ford control modules fitted to modern vehicles, including Engine, ABS/ESP, Airbag, Body Control, Climate Control, Instruments, TPMS, Power Steering, Transmission, Cruise Control, PATS, Seats, Doors, Mirrors, etc. For the engine this includes full functionality for modern systems such as EEC IV and EEC V. As well as slow (blink) codes from early EEC IV systems (both 2-digit and 3-digit blink codes are supported).

System Selection
Due to the expanded list of supported systems, the Ford main menu is split into sub-sections: 1. Powertrain (Engine, Transmission, Injector Control, Fuel Additive). 2. Chassis (ABS/ESP, Parking Brake, TPMS, PAS, Steering Angle Sensor, Cruise Control, 4x4). 3. Body (Airbag, Climate, Instruments, Body Control, PATS, Lights, Doors, Seats, Mirrors, Parking Aid, Tailgate). 4. Infotainment (Audio, Radio, CD Player, NAV, Display).

System Search
The system search function allows the OmiCheck to interrogate all possible fitted control modules fitted to a vehicle. Once the system search has been completed then a menu of available systems will be displayed. The operator can then select the required system for further diagnosis. There are now two options under System Search: 1. Quick Search. This option will interrogate the core control modules only (Engine, ABS/ESP, Airbag, Climate Control, Body Control, Instruments, Parking Brake etc.). 2. Full Search. This option will interrogate ALL Control Modules (as the OmiCheck now supports, and therefore searches for, every Ford control module this may take several minutes to complete). NOTE: All module names are displayed as acronyms and the show the help text when a menu is being displayed. key can be used to

General Diagnostics
All of the generic systems have the options to read and clear DTCs, display Electronic Control Module (ECM) data and perform a self test if available.

215

Manufacturer Applications
Self Test
The purpose of the self test is for the control module to run an internal test that will check the module inputs and outputs for fault conditions. The module will activate outputs and monitor inputs to determine faults such as open/short circuits etc. The self test should have been completed within a maximum of 30 seconds. After the completion of the self test then all of the control modules outputs are returned to their initial state. NOTE: Some control modules will require certain conditions to be met for the test to be successfully passed. Generally all switches should remain off. GEM (General Electric Module) - All doors should be open, bonnet and boot closed. Rear wash wiper set to intermittent. Press and hold the hazard warning light switch. HEC (Hybrid Electronic Cluster) - Sports / Economy switch cycled if fitted. NOTE: If the self test indicates a result code then this may be due to the conditions for the test not being correct and not the control module.

Engine Management Guide

If there is doubt as to which engine management system is fitted to the vehicle under test but the vehicle has a J1962 connector (16-pin), examine the connector. If pins 2 and 10 are fitted, the vehicle is EEC V but if pins 3 and 11 are fitted, the vehicle is EEC IV - DCL. NOTE: The Ford Galaxy 1.9 TDi with a VW engine is only accessible via the VAG application. The OmiCheck will attempt to establish serial communications with the vehicle. Once established, follow the on-screen instructions for each test. NOTE: If the ECU detects a fault then the live data may be set to a default value. Check the fault codes and rectify any problems before using the live data values.

Selection of Diagnostic System

Ford traditionally used EECIV (Electronic Engine Control, version 4) on all their vehicles from the early 1980s until the mid 1990s. The Ford diagnostic unit at this time was called a STAR tester, (Self Test Automatic Read-out). It only showed either a 2 or 3 digit code, which the technician looked up in a table to get the description. No live data or component tests were available. Around 1994, Ford introduced a more advanced system called EECV (Electronic Engine Control, version 5). This system was only fitted to some vehicles. Ford then merged the two systems, which was known by various names. Amongst these are EECIV1/2, EECIV enhanced and DCL (Data Communications Link). For these systems Ford use the WDS (World Diagnostic System) diagnostic tool, these systems show live data and have limited component tests.

216

Manufacturer Applications
By 1998 all Ford vehicles had changed to the EECV system, except: Those vehicles made in collaboration with the Japanese i.e. Maverick, Probe etc. which use Japanese engine management systems. The diesel Ford Galaxy which has a VW engine and uses the Bosch EDC system. Transit 94 models which use the Lucas EPIC system.

EEC V Menu
Select the type of engine fitted to the vehicle then follow the on-screen instructions: For a diesel vehicle, the type of engine can usually be found on the plastic engine cover. To use a petrol variant the Petrol option should be selected. If the Petrol option has been selected the following options will be provided: 1. Read DTCs 2. Clear DTCs 3. Live Data 1 4. Live Data 2 5. Freeze Data 6. Continuous Tests 7. Output Test 8. KOEO Test 9. KOER Test 10. Read VIN For help on freeze data and continuous tests, refer to the EOBD section of this document.

Output Test - Circuit Tests

The ignition must be on and the engine off. "Test in Progress" will be displayed. The test will automatically exit after 20 seconds for safety.

KO EO Test - Key On/Engine Off Self Test

This test is programmed into the ECU. It is to be carried out with the ignition on but engine off. Switch off all ancillary items e.g. Heaters, Aircon etc. "Performing test Please wait" will be displayed whilst the test is being performed. After the test has been completed the test results will be requested and the fault codes displayed.

217

Manufacturer Applications
KO ER Test - Key On/Engine Running Self Test
This test is similar to the KO EO test but with the engine running. Ensure the engine is at the correct operating temperature and follow the instructions on the display otherwise incorrect DTCs will be reported. NOTE: For both KO EO and KO ER, the test results reported do not necessarily indicate a faulty component or system. Some fault codes reported may be for components or systems not fitted to the vehicle. A fault may also be reported if the test was performed with the system in an incorrect state (i.e. Power steering not operated during the test when requested or the Aircon turned on). All peripheral items should be turned off at the start of the test, e.g. heaters fans and Aircon.

Read VIN - Read the Vehicle Identification Number stored in the ECU
This will attempt to read the VIN from the ECU if it is supported/available.

Injector Programming (TDCi Engines)

This function is required by service centres when an Injector needs to be replaced, or there is a driveability problem. For 1.8 TDCi and 2.0 TDCi engines the each injector has a 16-digit calibration code stamped on the body. For 1.6 TDCi engines the each injector has an 8-digit calibration code stamped on the body. These codes relate to the electrical and structural characteristics of each injector, which are defined during production. The PCM must know the calibration codes for each injector in order to treat and operate the injectors in the correct manner. This helps to reduce emissions and improve performance. The code must be programmed in by communicating and downloading the code into the PCMs memory. There are three common situations which demand this function. 1. After Injector replacement. 2. Fuel injection system calibration. 3. To cure drivability problems. Lack of power, black smoke and the presence of DTCs P2336, P2337, P2338 can often be fixed by re-entering the existing 4 injector codes.

218

Manufacturer Applications
Injector Programming is used on the following vehicles: Model
Fiesta Focus Focus (new shape) Focus C-Max Mondeo Mondeo Transit Transit Transit Connect 1.6 TDCi 1.8 TDCi 1.6 TDCi 1.6 TDCi 2.0 TDCi 2.2 TDCi 2.0 TDCi 2.4 TDCi 1.8 TDCi

Engine
2004 -

MY
2001 - 2005 2005 2005 2000 - 2006 2005 - 2006 2000 - 2005 2000 - 2005 2002 - 2006

NOTE:

On earlier model years (approx pre-2003) it is not possible to read the actual
injector codes. On these vehicles you will see 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 or FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF or a mixture.

After entering an injector code the fuel system will initially run without any pilot
injection sequence. The car must be driven for a few miles to correct this. The codes of the ORIGINAL injectors fitted to vehicle can be found on a label, which is fitted to the side of the engine or on the engine rocker top (if it has not yet been removed).

219

Manufacturer Applications

OM1349

1.6 TDCi Engines: - Injector label arrowed in illustration

OM1350

Injector codes arrowed in illustration

220

Manufacturer Applications
The codes on the label are in the following format:
(1&2) (3&4) X1111111122222222X X3333333344444444X

Where: 11111111 is the code for injector 1, 22222222 is the code for injector 2, 33333333 is the code for injector 3, 44444444 is the code for injector 4. NOTE: The injectors are in the physical order, NOT firing order.

TRANSMISSION

INJ:
OM1356

View from front of vehicle.

Injector codes can be also be read from the injectors fitted as the codes are stamped on a ring attached to the head of the injector, underneath the connector.

221

Manufacturer Applications

OM1352

1.8 TDCi Engines: - Injector label arrowed in illustration - Side view

OM1351

Injector label & Injector head arrowed in illustration - Front view

222

Manufacturer Applications

OM1353

Injector label - gives four 16 digit numbers

NOTE: The injectors on the label are in physical order, NOT firing order.

TRANSMISSION

INJ:
OM1357

View from front of vehicle.

Injector codes can be also be read from the injectors fitted as the codes are stamped on a ring attached to the head of the injector, underneath the connector.

223

Manufacturer Applications

OM1354

2.0 TDCi Engines: - Injector label arrowed in illustration - Side view

224

Manufacturer Applications

OM1355

Injector label - gives four 16 digit numbers

NOTE: The injectors on the label are in firing order, NOT physical order. The top left code is Injector 1 (Cyl.1), the top right code is Injector 2 (Cyl.3), the bottom left is Injector 3 (Cyl.4) and the bottom right is Injector 4 (Cyl.2). Where Injector is the firing number, Cylinder is the physical number. When replacing an Injector the code stamped on the body of the new Injector must be programmed into the PCM, NOT the code on the label. WARNING: Before attempting Injector Programming it is necessary for the vehicle to be left stationary with the Engine off for at least 8 hours. This is to ensure that the engine is stone cold before Injector Programming is performed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in failure of the Injector Programming function and/or driveability problems.

EEC IV Menu
This application functions in a similar way to the Ford EEC V application although the range of tests available is reduced.

225

Manufacturer Applications
Live Data
Live data is read from the ECU and displayed. Pressing the 'tick' button will print a snapshot of live data on the printer. Some of the parameters displayed may not be suitable to some systems. e.g. the park/neutral switch.

Cont. Codes - Continuous Codes

This displays the DTCs (fault codes) stored during a normal drive cycle.

Clear Codes
Clears the DTCs displayed in the Continuous Code test above. Some faults may only be stored in the memory under driving conditions and will not be stored after the 'Clear Continuous Codes' function. Performing the KO EO and KO ER tests will clear the memory hence 'Continuous Codes' should be read before either KO EO or KO ER is run.

KO EO Test - Key On/Engine Off Self Test

This self-test operates as in the case of EEC V.

KO ER Test - Key On/Engine Running Self Test

This test is similar to the KO EO test but with the engine running. Ensure the engine is at the correct operating temperature and follow the instructions on the display otherwise incorrect DTCs will be reported. After the engine has been started allow the check lights to clear and normal idle to be established. 'Performing Test' will be displayed as the controller runs the test. Engine speed will rise to mark the start of the test. The operator should then promptly: 1. Turn the steering wheel full lock from left to right. Code 521 is displayed if the action is not preformed. 2. Press and release brake pedal to operate the brake switch. Code 536 is displayed if the action is not preformed. 3. Toggle O/D switch if fitted. Code 653 is displayed if the action is not preformed. 4. When the engine returns to idle wait 10 - 15 seconds then blip the throttle to exceed 4000 rpm. Code 538 is displayed if the action is not preformed. Code 411 or 412 is displayed if the action is preformed at the wrong part of the test. If there is a fault present at the start then Code 998 is displayed along with the normal fault code and the self-test will not be performed.

226

Manufacturer Applications
Blink Codes Instructions
Select either 2-digit or 3-digit slow code reader from the menu according to the type listed in the application list for the vehicle under test. While the application is reading, the tester emits sounds. The tick sound indicates that the application is running and functioning and the beep sounds when a code is being received from the system under test. There is no live data facility available with slow code systems. Turning the ignition off and on resets the system for the next test so the user is required to follow the OmiCheck instructions in order to determine when these operations should be performed. NOTES:

Fault codes reported by this application do not necessarily indicate a faulty

component or system, Some fault codes may be for components or systems not fitted to the vehicle.

A fault may also be reported if the test has not been performed correctly. A fault for a component may indicate a fault wiring circuit. The wiring to the
component must be completely checked before components are changed.

All peripheral items must be switched off at the start of the test e.g. heater fans and
air conditioning.

Printing the Results (OmiCheck only)

Each test prompts the user when printing is available. Refer to the printer instruction for connection to the OmiCheck. A header is printed when the application is requested to print for the first time during a test. It is recommended that the printout is not removed until all tests have been performed as there will not be a header output for further tests until the OmiCheck is reset.

3-Digit Systems
All the tests are routines performed by the vehicle with either the engine running or with the ignition only on. Therefore to get clear codes, actuator tests or wiggle tests, the application initiates the KO EO or KO ER tests. Fault codes are output during the KO EO and KO ER test. There are two types of fault output by the vehicle. The first are current faults that are present at the time of test and KAM (Keep Alive Memory) which are faults recorded in the memory and may be present or have occurred and are now absent.

227

Manufacturer Applications
A feature of these systems is that fault codes are transmitted twice, so although the repeated codes will appear on the screen, the final code listing will only display the faults once. During the test, the OmiCheck application will instruct the user to perform actions. For instance, Turn the steering wheel or Press the throttle. These actions not only allow the system to test the switches but also indicate to the vehicle to progress through the test. If these actions are not followed, the test result output indicates that the test was not performed correctly. The user should make a judgement as to whether this is correct or that a switch is faulty.

KO EO Test - Key On/Engine Off Self Test

KO EO test runs the complete set of functions: 1. Read present fault codes. This function will take a while but an indication of progress should occur within one minute. If there is no response, assume communication problems and check the connection and that the ignition is turned on as and when instructed. 2. Read KAM fault codes. This operates in the same way as reading present fault codes as described above. 3. Actuator (circuit) tests. While Actuator test is displayed, pressing the throttle will cause actuators and relays to be turned on and off in line with the throttle switch. Listening and feeling the relays enables the user to determine the function of these circuits. 4. Wiggle test. This routine functions in the same way as the wiggle test listed below.

KO ER Test - Key On/Engine Running Self Test

KO ER test requires that the engine is at normal operating temperature (above 80C). A good indication of this is when the cooling fan switches on for the first time. The testing is performed in the same manner as the KO EO test with the exception that there is no Actuator test available. There may be more user operations to perform so it is recommended that the OmiCheck screen be watched carefully.

Wiggle Test
Wiggle test is used to look for open-circuit wiring faults between sensors and the engine controller. The controller responds quite slowly to this test so slow movements of the wiring should be undertaken to generate a wiggle test fault. Practice the wiggle test by removing and replacing a connector like the throttle potentiometer and watching the OmiCheck display for the change of state. Some sensors can only be detected in the KO EO condition while others only in the KO ER mode.

228

Manufacturer Applications
The application will initiate the fault reading process then when codes start, will activate the wiggle test. Wait while this occurs.

Clear Fault Codes

Do not perform this operation until after the KO EO and KO ER tests have been performed, as this function will delete any stored codes. The application will initiate the fault reading process then when codes start, will activate the clear code routine. Wait whilst this occurs.

2 - Digit Systems with KAM

There are two sets of fault codes in relation to this system. Care should be taken in selecting the correct vehicle from the application list where the appropriate table of faults is indicated before selecting the OmiCheck menu. Enhanced EEC IV systems operate in a similar manner to 3-digit codes with active fault codes. KAM fault codes wiggle test, KO EO and KO ER. There are no circuit tests available. For best results, follow the tests in order: KO EO, continuous test then the KO ER test. Vehicles fitted with 2.4i and 2.9i engines do not have the KAM feature.

KO ER Test - Key On/Engine Running Self Test

The vehicle is required to be at normal operating temperature before this vehicle self-test routine will start. The vehicle will wait until the engine is warm. Active followed by KAM faults will be output when the dynamic test starts. The user may be requested to press the throttle to greater than 4000rpm. This should be done promptly otherwise a fault will be reported. It may take up to ten minutes before the codes are output or the throttle request appears. The self-test routine then enters the service adjust routine. If a fault has been reported, the vehicle may not enter into this mode. Do not wait longer than ten minutes for the service mode to start. Service mode allows the user to adjust idle speed and check timing values. The vehicle allows approximately ten minutes for this operation before the test ends. If the time allowed is inadequate, the KO ER test will need to be restarted from the beginning. Do not adjust the system after service mode has finished.
System 1.1, 1.4, 2.0 CFi 1.6 EFi 2.0 DOHC EFi Idle Speed 1200 + 50 rpm 900 + 50 rpm 875 + 75 rpm Timing Check Value 10 BTDC 10 BTDC N/A

229

Manufacturer Applications
Clear Fault Codes Active fault codes are cleared when the problem is repaired. KAM faults are automatically cleared as a consequence of reading the fault code. Therefore it is important that the faults are recorded during the test. Disconnecting the vehicle battery will also erase any codes stored. This may result in surging engine speed, lumpy idle, hesitancy and poor driveability. When the battery is reconnected: Allow engine to idle for three minutes. Wait until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. Raise the engine speed to 1200 rpm and hold for two minutes. Drive the vehicle for five miles under a variety of road and traffic conditions.

2- Digit Systems Without KAM (2.8i & 2.0i) and IAW Systems
Active fault codes only are available on this system. Any faults are cleared when the ignition is switched off. Before reading fault codes, allow the vehicle some time to determine whether any faults are present for both ignition on, engine off and with engine running. The user will be asked to crank the engine if the engine will not start. This is for the system to test the vehicle components.

EPIC
This system operates as in the case of EEC V.

230

Manufacturer Applications
GM Opel/Vauxhall
Application Menu
Select GM Opel/Vauxhall from the Main Menu. From the sub-menu select the required system e.g. EMS (Engine Management System), ABS or Airbag etc. or CAN System Search.

CAN System Search

The first option in the menu is CAN System Search. The function is applicable to the following vehicles: GM Opel/Vauxhall - Astra H GM Opel/Vauxhall - Corsa D GM Opel/Vauxhall - Signum GM Opel/Vauxhall - Vectra C GM Opel/Vauxhall - Zafira B The OmiCheck will communicate with the vehicles Instrument Pack to determine the vehicle model. If the vehicle model is unknown the operator will be asked to select the vehicle model. This function allows the Read DTCs and Clear DTCs on all Control Modules fitted to the above vehicles.

Read DTCs
The OmiCheck will automatically communicate with all Control Modules. A list of Control Modules found and the number of DTCs stored on each will be displayed. The operator can then select a Control Module and view and print the DTCs stored.

Clear DTCs
The OmiCheck gives the option to Clear DTCs from ALL Control Modules fitted to the vehicle (Clear All DTCs), or to Clear DTCs from each individual Control Module separately (Clear DTCs by ECU). When Clear all DTCs is selected the OmiCheck will communicate with ALL Control Modules fitted to the vehicle and send a Clear DTCs command. The OmiCheck will then read all DTCs from all Control Modules and display a list of the results. When Clear DTCs by ECU is selected the OmiCheck will automatically communicate with all Control Modules and produce a list of Control Modules found and the number of DTCs stored. The operator can then select a Control Module and Clear the DTCs from that Control Module. The operator can then update the list of DTCs by prompting the OmiCheck

231

Manufacturer Applications
to re-read all DTCs or go back to the original list and select another Control Module to clear.

System Selection
Alternatively the operator can manually select individual systems from the main menu (e.g. Body Control Module or Power Steering). Read DTCs and Clear DTCs can then be performed on the selected Control Module.

Engine Management Systems (Only)

If the vehicle under test was manufactured after 1998 the Auto Search 1998> option should be used. This option prompts the OmiCheck to automatically identity the Engine Control Module. If the vehicle under test was manufactured before 1999, or the operator knows the Engine Code of the vehicle or the name of the Engine Control Module, the Engine Size/Code or the Control Unit option should be used. These options should also be used in the rare cases where the Auto Search option cannot identify the Engine Control Module on post -1998 vehicles.

232

Manufacturer Applications
Honda
EMS
Scroll through the menu and select the type of control unit fitted to the vehicle and follow the on-screen instructions.

Read Faults
Follow instruction on screen to obtain fault numbers, select fault codes from menu, select relevant fault numbers to display fault text.

Clear Faults
Follow instructions on screen to clear fault codes from engine management system.

ABS Read Faults

Bosch 5.0 The fault codes can be retrieved from this system by bridging pins 2 & 5 on the 5-pin diagnostic connector. This uses the same blink codes pattern as the EMS system detailed above. Honda ABS The fault codes can be retrieved from the system by ignoring the ABS diagnostic connector and bridging the two pins of the 2-pin EMS data link connector. Honda ALB The fault codes can be retrieved from the system by ignoring the ABS diagnostic connector and bridging the two pins of the 2-pin EMS data link connector.

Clear Faults
Bosch 5.0 To clear the codes turn ignition off, then switch ignition ON and repeat process 20 times. Honda ABS To clear codes turn ignition off, bridge data link terminals of 2-pin connector. Press and hold brake pedal, with pedal depressed turn ignition ON. Wait until warning lamp illuminates then press and hold brake pedal. Wait again with pedal depressed until warning lamp extinguishes then release pedal. Wait 5 seconds, warning lamp flashes twice. Trouble codes should now be erased.

233

Manufacturer Applications
Honda ALB To clear codes turn ignition OFF, remove ABS (15A) fuse from under bonnet fuse box for a minimum of 3 seconds. Refit fuse.

Airbag
The coverage of the three systems is detailed below. All use the same comms as the EMS systems as detailed previously in this document.

Type A
Vehicle
Accord / Shuttle Aerodeck Civic Coupe CRX Integra type R Prelude / CR-V / HR-V S2000

Years
1995-2000 1996-1997 1996-2000 1996-1999 1996-1997 1998-2000 1994 -2000 1999-2000

Type B
Vehicle
Accord Civic CRX Prelude

Years
1993-1994 1992-1994 1995 1992-1996

Type C
Vehicle
Accord Coupe Aerodeck Civic Shuttle

Years
1995 1995 1994-1995 1995

234

Manufacturer Applications
Read Faults
TYPE A: Ensure ignition has been turned OFF for 10 seconds or longer, bridge 2-pin data link connector terminals. Turn ignition ON, Type B: Faults on this system can only be read from the SRS (Supplementary Restraint Systems) warning lamp which is situated on the left hand side of the steering wheel under a cover. TYPE C: Ensure ignition is turned OFF, bridge 2-pin data link connector terminals. Turn ignition On.

Clear Faults
TYPE A: Ensure ignition is turned off, bridge memory erase connector (2-pin) which is located to the right of the steering column under the facia panel) Turn ignition ON, SRS warning lamp illuminates for 6 seconds. Disconnect bridge wire within 4 seconds of SRS warning lamp extinguishing. SRS lamp illuminates, bridge connector terminals within 4 seconds of warning lamp illuminating. SRS lamp extinguishes. Disconnect bridge wire within 4 seconds of warning lamp extinguishing. SRS warning lamp flashes twice. Switch ignition OFF - trouble code should be cleared. TYPE B: Switching OFF ignition clears fault codes. TYPE C: Ensure ignition is turned off, bridge memory erase connector (2-pin), which is located to the right of the steering column under the facia panel. Turn ignition ON, SRS warning lamp illuminates for 6 seconds. Disconnect bridge wire within 4 seconds of SRS warning lamp extinguishing. SRS lamp illuminates, bridge connector terminals within 4 seconds of warning lamp illuminating. SRS lamp extinguishes. Disconnect bridge wire within 4 seconds of warning lamp extinguishing. SRS warning lamp flashes twice. Switch ignition OFF - Wait a few seconds. Turn ignition ON SRS warning lamp illuminates for 6 seconds. Check that SRS warning lamp does not illuminate after 30 seconds. Turn ignition OFF.

Transmission
Vehicle Civic Accord Years 1991-2000 1993-1998

Read Faults
Fault codes for either vehicle can be accessed via the 2 pin data link connector by bridging the terminals on the 2 pin data link connector and turning the ignition on.

235

Manufacturer Applications
Clear Faults
To clear codes, follow this procedure: Switch ignition off. Remove bridge wire. Remove back up (radio) fuse (7.5A) from under bonnet fusebox for 10 seconds. Refit fuse. NOTE: Disconnecting this fuse will erase any memory from in-car entertainment or electronic clocks.

236

Manufacturer Applications
Land Rover
Control Module ID
Selecting this option displays the module version information.

Maintenance
Selecting 'Maintenance' allows the resetting of the adaptations to factory settings for the components listed in the menu. It is recommended that the adaptations be reset to factory settings as opposed to the `learned' settings once the components have been replaced.

Learn Security
This option allows the control module to learn a new security value input by the user.

Tune
Ensure all electrical loads are off, select 'Tune' and follow the instructions on the OmiCheck. The OmiCheck will now take you through the tune.

Programming
This option prompts for a vehicle type to be selected then offers a programming menu for that type of vehicle. The programming option allows a new ABS ECU to be set up on that vehicle.

Immobilisation
Follow the on-screen instructions to perform a security check and if security is supported, program the alarm immobilisation.

Bleeding
Selecting this option allows brake bleeding on the vehicle, full on-screen instructions are provided. Firstly, a modulator bleed is performed in the order: Left Front, Right Front, Right Rear, Left Rear. The operator is instructed to press and hold the brake pedal throughout the modulator bleeding procedure. The procedure can be repeated as many times as required. Upon completion, the operator is instructed to release the brake pedal. Secondly, a power bleed is performed in the order Left Front, Right Front, Right Rear, Left Rear. The operator can start and stop the pump using the up and down arrows with the OmiCheck as instructed. Use the tick key to move on to the next wheel. Once completed, an instruction will appear informing the operator that the procedure is complete.

237

Manufacturer Applications
Transmitters/Key Programmers
This option allows the user to program/re-program remote keys/fobs for use with the vehicle security/central locking.

Synchronise ECU
This option allows the user to setup a new/replacement ECU with the vehicles existing ECUs.

Write Cal Values

This option enables the user to re-calibrate the suspension on Range Rover vehicles fitted with Air Suspension.

Air Suspension System (Ride Level Module - RLM)

Discovery III (L319) (2005 - 2009) Range Rover Sport (L320) (2005 - 2009) Range Rover (L322) (2006 - 2009) There are several functions available via the OmiCheck. Set Operating Mode. Set Tolerance Control Mode. Deflation Routines.

Set Operating Mode

This procedure is used to set the RLM to different modes. Modes can be set under the Configuration option of the OmiCheck. The current operating mode can be displayed under the Live Data option of the OmiCheck. Pre-test conditions The ignition must be ON. An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply.

Normal Mode
This is the normal operating mode for the RLM.

238

Manufacturer Applications
Manufacturing Mode
This mode is mainly used in the factory when assembling the vehicle. It can, however, also be used if the owner of the vehicle wishes to fit coil springs instead of the air springs. Placing the control module in this mode ensures that the control module continues to function in terms of processing information such as height information. This process will render the Air Suspension controls and instruments non-functional. NOTE: If the vehicle is driven in any mode other than Normal Mode, the Air Suspension will NOT operate correctly.

Set Tolerance Control

This procedure is used to set the RLM tolerance control. Tolerance control can be set under the Configuration option of the OmiCheck. The current tolerance control state can be displayed under the Live Data option of the OmiCheck. Pre-test conditions The ignition must be ON. An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply.

Normal Tolerances
This state is the normal operating mode for the Air Suspension system.

Tighter Tolerances
This state is used when another part of the vehicle is being aligned or calibrated. The two main instances where this state is used are: Wheel alignment; Adaptive Headlamp calibration.

Deflation Routines
There are several routines available for this system. Deflate air springs Deflate reservoir Deflate all (air springs and reservoir) Exit deflate mode.

239

Manufacturer Applications
Pre-test conditions: The ignition must be ON; An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply. NOTE: The vehicle will lower during deflation of the air suspension. To avoid damage, ensure all doors are closed. WARNING: It is the responsibility of the technician to ensure that air has been fully expelled from the air suspension system even if the OmiCheck indicates that the routine has completed successfully. The procedure may need to be run more than once to ensure all air is expelled from the system. Failure to do so may result in personal injury.

Exit Deflate Mode

After the work has been completed the technician must re-enable the system using the Exit Deflate Mode option to restore normal operation of the air suspension system.

Air Suspension System (EHC2)

Range Rover (L322) (2002 - 2006) There are four functions available via the OmiCheck for the EHC2 air suspension system. Actuators Set Operating Mode Set Tolerance Control Mode Deflation Routines

Actuators
There are a number of actuators available on the OmiCheck. These are split into two different sections.

Level Selection
The OmiCheck can be used to force the air suspension system to any level as an alternative to using the ride height switch inside the vehicle. Access Level. Motorway Level. Standard Level. Off-road Level. These are useful for the diagnosis of faults with the ride height switch and wiring.

240

Manufacturer Applications
Pre-test conditions: The engine must be RUNNING.

Drive Outputs
The following outputs can be driven individually using the OmiCheck. Front right valve Front left valve Rear right valve Rear left valve Exhaust valve Reservoir valve Compressor valve High-pressure exhaust valve Front cross-link valve Rear cross-link valve Access LED Motorway LED Standard LED Off-road LED Hold LED Pre-test conditions The ignition must be ON and the engine OFF.

Set Operating Mode

There are four functions available via the OmiCheck for the EHC2 system. Transport mode Low Tolerance Mode (used during wheel alignment or headlamp levelling) Production Mode (used to disable all control circuits within the system) Normal Mode (to cancel all of the above). There procedures are used to set the control module to different modes. Modes can be set under the Service Functions option of the OmiCheck. The current operating mode can be displayed under the Live Data option of the OmiCheck.

241

Manufacturer Applications
Pre-test conditions The ignition must be ON. An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply. NOTE: If the vehicle is driven in any mode other than Normal Mode, the air suspension will not operate correctly.

Deflation Routines
There are seven routines available for this system. Deflate right front Deflate left front Deflate right rear Deflate left rear Deflate front Deflate rear Deflate all These routines for use prior to servicing the air suspension system to reduce the risk of injury by compressed air. Pre-test conditions The ignition must be ON. An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply. NOTE: The vehicle will lower during deflation of the air suspension. To avoid damage, ensure all doors are closed. WARNING: It is the responsibility of the technician to ensure that air has been fully expelled from the air suspension system even if the OmiCheck indicates that the routine has completed successfully. The procedure may need to be run more than once to ensure all air is expelled from the system. Failure to do so may result in personal injury.

242

Manufacturer Applications
Inflation
When work has been completed on the specified area the air suspension can be re-inflated either by selecting the corresponding Inflation routine or by starting the engine. When the engine is running, the system will inflate the four corners to the correct height for the currently selected level.

Inflation Routines
There are seven routines available for this system. Inflate right front Inflate left front Inflate right rear Inflate left rear Inflate front Inflate rear Inflate all These routines are to be used either when work has been completed on a section of the air suspension system or to try and level the vehicle in an emergency repair situation. NOTE: The vehicle will raise during inflation of the air suspension. To avoid damage, ensure all doors are closed. Pre-test conditions The ignition must be ON. An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power supply. NOTE: These routines may need to be repeated more than once to completely inflate the specified area.

243

Manufacturer Applications
Mercedes
If the vehicle under test has both the round diagnostic connector and the J1962 (16 pin) connector, the round connector should always be used to access information via the Mercedes application and the J1962 connector should be used to access data via the EOBD application.

Sensotronic BC
WARNING:

Always deactivate the Sensotronic BC before carrying out any maintenance

work.

Only fully-qualified technicians should carry out work on the brake system.
They must be familiar with modern brake systems.

Only carry out maintenance work when the vehicle is stationary. Only carry out maintenance work on the brake after the system has been
deactivated.

Upon deactivation, a warning message should appear in the instrument

panel and an audible warning signal is heard until the maintenance work is complete and the system reactivated.

If the warning signals do not occur, assume that the system is not fully
deactivated and do not carry out any maintenance work. NOTE: Omitec Group accept no responsibility for any accident or injury arising from the maintenance of the Sensotronic brake system. From the sub-menu select the Control Module and follow the on-screen instructions. The OmiCheck will attempt to establish communications with the vehicle. Once established, follow the on screen instructions for each test. On selecting the item the following sub-menu will be displayed: 1. Read Faults 2. Clear Faults

244

Manufacturer Applications
MG Rover
Tuning with OmiCheck
Ensure all electrical loads are off, select 'Tune' and follow the instructions on the OmiCheck. The OmiCheck will now take you through the tune.

Stepper Motor Setting

The stepper motor is set in the following manner. The engine is kept constant, controlled by the ECU and will not change. Any adjustment of the air by-pass screw will change the position of the stepper motor. The OmiCheck uses graphics to instruct the operator to 'raise' or 'lower' the stepper motor position. The stepper motor position is displayed on the screen and is only used to guide the operator to ensure the screw is turned in the correct direction.
This screen indicates the stepper position needs to be increased 'coarsely'.

This screen indicates the stepper position needs to be increased 'finely'.

This screen indicates the stepper position needs to be decreased 'coarsely'.

This screen indicates the stepper position needs to be decreased 'finely'.

245

Manufacturer Applications
This screen indicates the stepper position is correct and the 'Tick' key can be pressed.

If the OmiCheck screen displays 'Lower', an adjustment is required to lower the stepper motor position. For this to happen the air by-pass screw needs adjusting as if to raise the engine speed. If the OmiCheck screen displays 'Raise', an adjustment is required to raise the stepper motor position. For this to happen the air by-pass screw needs adjusting as if to lower the engine speed. NOTE: Adjustment of the air by-pass screw will not change the engine speed as it is under control of the ECU. Press if unable to set correctly using air by-pass or throttle adjustment.

ECU Replacement
The MEMS idle control is an adaptive system and the ECU `learns' the engine load and wear characteristics over a period of time. The amount of stepper motor movement required to maintain the specified idle consequently will differ from model to model. In the event of a new ECU or an ECU from another vehicle being fitted, it will take a short period of normal running for the ECU to learn the load and wear characteristics of that engine. WARNING: Whenever a different ECU is fitted, a full tune with the OmiCheck must take place, as idle CO2 and stepper position could differ, which can ONLY be set by adjusting the ECU.

Immobilisation
Follow the on-screen instructions to perform a security check and if security is supported, program the alarm immobilisation.

Maintenance
The maintenance selection allows the resetting of the adaptations to factory settings for the components listed in the menu. It is recommended that the adaptations be reset to factory settings as opposed to the 'learned' settings once the components have been replaced.

246

Manufacturer Applications
Mitsubishi
1995 MY Onwards
With vehicles fitted with the J1962 OBD type diagnostic connectors, the OmiCheck cannot retrieve blink code faults using the standard OmiCheck leads.

ABS
ABS faults can be obtained by bridging the pins 1 and 4 (GND) on the vehicle's J1962 connector. The diagnostic malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) located on the dashboard flashes blink codes. Interpret the blink codes - See 'Interpretation of Blink Codes'. The fault description relating to the fault code is detailed in the table below. ABS Fault Code Look up Table
Fault Code 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 23 24 38 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 51 53 63 71 Description Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front - Open Circuit Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front - Open Circuit Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear - Open Circuit Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear - Open Circuit Wheel Speed Sensors - Signal Out of Limits Supply Voltage Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front - Short Circuit Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front - Short Circuit Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear - Short Circuit Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear - Short Circuit Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Solenoid Valve, RH Front Inlet Solenoid Valve, LH Front Inlet Solenoid Valve, RH Rear Inlet Solenoid Valve, LH Rear Inlet Solenoid Valve, RH Front Outlet Solenoid Valve, LH Front Outlet Solenoid Valve, RH Rear Outlet Solenoid Valve, LH Rear Outlet Solenoid Valve - Supply Voltage Electronic Control Module (ECM) Hydraulic Pump Motor Pyrotechnic Pretensioner, Passengers Side - Short Circuit to Positive

247

Manufacturer Applications
72 73 74 Pyrotechnic Pretensioner, Passengers Side - Short Circuit to Negative Pyrotechnic Pretensioner, Passengers Side - Short Circuit Pyrotechnic Pretensioner, Passengers Side - Open Circuit

Interpretation of Blink Codes

Note all fault codes using these guidelines: Short Flash - Indicates 'Units' of fault code. Long flash - Indicates 'Tens' of fault code. Short pause - Between 'Tens' and 'Units' of the same fault code. Long pause - Between different fault codes.

248

Manufacturer Applications
Nissan
Transmission
CVT transmission faults on the Micra 1992-1999 can be read via the transmission lamp on the instrument panel: 1. Turning ignition OFF 2. Move transmission selector to position 'D' 3. Turn ignition ON 4. Ensure transmission warning lamp illuminates 5. Depress brake pedal fully and hold 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully and hold 7. Move transmission selector to the following positions: From position 'D' to 'Ds' to 'D' to 'N' to 'R' to 'P' 8. Release accelerator pedal 9. Start engine and allow to idle 10. The transmission warning lamp will illuminate for 2.5 seconds followed by several short flashes NOTE: Continual flashing of the transmission warning lamp indicates system voltage to high or low. No fault codes recorded: All short flashes will be the same. Fault codes recorded: 1 short flash will be longer that the others When finished turn ignition off and rectify faults as necessary
Flashes/Fault Codes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FAULT Accelerator pedal position (APP) switch 1 & 2 - Circuit malfunction Transmission range (TR) switch - Circuit malfunction Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - Circuit malfunction Transmission electromagnet clutch - Circuit malfunction Transmission fluid pressure (TFP) solenoid - Circuit malfunction Transmission control module (TCM)/Engine control module (ECM) torque signal Transmission control module (TCM/ABS) Control module/idle speed control (ISC) relay - Circuit malfunction

Clearing Codes: Switching off ignition erases trouble codes.

249

Manufacturer Applications
Renault
EMS General
NOTE: For Renault vehicles which use the Renault Card Keyless Ignition System and the START button (Megane II, Scenic II etc.): To switch the ignition on WITHOUT starting the engine: 1. Unlock the car with the remote (card). 2. Insert the card into the card reader. 3. Without pressing the brake or clutch pedal push and hold the START button for at least 5 seconds. The dash should illuminate and the button should be released. All diagnostics can now be carried out.

Injector Programming
The purpose of this function is to enable the technician to replace a faulty injector, or injectors, and program in the value of the new injector to the Diesel Control Unit. It may also be used when a new Control Unit has been installed and the technician is required to program it with the values of the injectors fitted. The function is available on most of the following Engine Management Systems: Bosch EDC15C3, fitted to 1.9 DCi and 2.2 DCi engines. Bosch EDC16, fitted to 1.9DCi and 2.0DCi engines. Delphi Lucas LVCR, fitted to 1.5 DCi engines. Delphi Lucas DDCR, fitted to 1.5 DCi engines. Injectors are classified in the factory according to their respective flow: at idle speed, when fully charged or in the pre-injection phase. For the Bosch systems a 6-digit alphanumeric code is engraved on the Injector indicating the classification. For the Delphi Lucas systems a 16-digit alphanumeric code is engraved on the Injector indicating the classification. The code for each injector is stored in the memory of the ECU, enabling the ECU to control each injector taking into account the variations in their manufacture. The OmiCheck has the ability to read out the current injector codes and program in new ones.

250

Manufacturer Applications
Airbag
Select the airbag system then select either 12-pin or 16-pin according to which connector is on the vehicle under test. Then follow the on-screen instructions. The following functions are available for the airbag system: 1. Read DTCs: Displays all diagnostic trouble codes associated with the airbag system. 2. Clear DTCs: Clears all faults codes from the airbag system. 3. Renault Arm/Disarm for Driver/Passenger Airbag: The Disarm CM (LOCK) menu option allows the driver airbag to be disabled preventing accidental deployment while working on the car. The Arm CM (UNLOCK) menu option causes the driver airbag to become active. The Disarm Passenger (LOCK) menu option allows the passenger airbag to be disabled preventing accidental deployment while working on the car. The Arm Passenger (UNLOCK) menu option causes the passenger airbag to become active. NOTE: Not all vehicles will have a passenger airbag and some vehicles with a passenger airbag cannot be armed/disarmed using a diagnostic tool (they require a key to be inserted into the arm/disarm lock located next to the passenger airbag). The way the user is notified by the vehicle of a locked airbag depends upon the vehicle model.

Vehicle Notification methods for a locked airbag

Method 1 - Fault Code present. If the user reads airbag diagnostic codes after an airbag has been locked some models will produce a 'Airbag locked' fault code. After unlocking, this fault code will not appear, this can be confirmed by reading the diagnostic codes again. Method 2 - Airbag MIL stays on After an airbag has been locked the Airbag Malfunction Indicator on the dash panel display will remain on, when the airbag is unlocked the MIL will switch off. Method 3 - Airbag MIL flashes for several seconds when turning the ignition on After an airbag has been locked the Airbag Malfunction Indicator on the dash panel display will flash for several seconds when the ignition is turned on, when the airbag is unlocked the MIL will switch off.

251

Manufacturer Applications
Renault
TPMS is the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System. Each valve sensor has a unique code and is matched to a particular wheel. This is programmed into the UCH control module. This enables a faulty wheel to be identified (given that the receiver can identify which wheel is transmitting). The sensor emits an RF (Radio Frequency) signal containing the valve code, status and tyre pressure. If wheels are to be swapped around then reprogramming will need to be carried out to identify the new position of the wheel. Each valve sensor has a coloured ring attached to the valve nut, each colour corresponds to a particular wheel position: Front Left: Green Front Right: Yellow Rear Left: Red Rear Right: Black It is recommended that if tyres are moved around that the coloured rings are replaced in the correct wheel position. Each valve sensor will emit a signal every hour if stationary, and every 15 minutes if a leak is present. If moving it will emit a signal every minute if no leak present, and every 10 seconds if a leak is present. NOTE: In the live data the tyre pressures will display a default value of 3.5 bar until the valves have been forced to transmit.

252

Manufacturer Applications
Renault (Type 1)
This feature allows the user to read and clear faults, view live data, test the TPMS display lights and reprogram the unit via the Command Menu. The Command Menu features are: 1. Program tyre valves - This allows the user to program 1 valve or 4 valves by a. Manually entering the valve code from the keypad. The code is written on a label if the sensor is new, or if the sensor is used then remove the tyre and read the code on the sensor b. Automatically forcing the valve to emit the code by using an exciter (such as the Omitec OmiDetect tool), or deflating the tyre pressure by at least 1 bar, or rotating the wheel by more than 20 km/h. When deflating the tyre the valve will not transmit until 15 minutes has elapsed. NOTE: If fault code 0007 is present, automatic coding will not be possible. When using the exciter it should be placed resting on the tyre under the appropriate valve. When the sensor has been excited and the transmitted code has been received the OmiCheck will indicate a successful read. The option is then given to program the new code. 2. Select the winter tyre option - This is used during the winter in some countries where the weather conditions require winter tyres. 3. Select the summer tyre option - This is used as default or during the summer when winter tyres are changed. 4. Set control module with TPMS option - Programs the control module with the TPMS option. 5. Set control module without TPMS option - Disables the TPMS option. 6. Set tyre pressure limits - Enables the setting of maximum and minimum tyre pressure limits. 7. Change trigger limit. 8. Drive the actuator - Tests the TPMS display lights.

253

Manufacturer Applications
Renault (Type 2)
With these vehicles all tyres need to be inflated to 3.7 bar for programming to be successful. In order to excite the valves to transmit their codes an exciter such as the Omitec OmiDetect tool should be used. An option is given as to select the current tyre set (Summer/Winter). Follow the on screen instructions which indicate the order the wheels are to be programmed in. After operating the exciter alongside the requested wheel, if successful a message will be displayed on the screen indicating that the valve code has been detected and displaying the valve code. After all 4 wheel codes have been successfully detected then an option is given to program the codes. NOTE: Remember to reset the correct tyre pressures when finished.

TPMS Trouble shooting

If a valve appears to not respond when stimulated with an exciter tool, check the following: The tyre valve is a TPMS valve. The exciter is not pointing directly at the valve stem. The valve stem is metal and will prevent a good RF signal. On low profile tyres, the area for the RF to penetrate the tyre sidewall is small, carefully aim the exciter half-way between the tyre rim and the tread. Check the batteries are not low in the exciter and the TPMS valve. If there is no response from the valve after the checks have been made then it could be that the TPMS valve itself is faulty.

Electronic Parking Brakes

WARNING:

Ensure that you are fully familiar with the braking system and its operation
before commencing any work.

The Electronic Parking Brake Control system may be required to be

deactivated before carrying out any Maintenance/diagnostic work on the brake system. This can be done from the OmiCheck menu.

Only carry out maintenance work when the vehicle is stationary. Ensure that the Electronic Parking Brake Control system is reactivated after
the maintenance work has been completed. NOTE: Omitec Group accept no responsibility for any accident or injury arising from the maintenance of the Electronic Parking Brake system.

254

User Menu
User Menu

Overview
USER MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. OBD DTC Lookup Language Menu Tester Setup Self Test Software Version Security CAN Converter

Use the and selection. NOTE: Press

keys to select the required function and press to return to the Main Menu.

to confirm the

OBD DTC Lookup

This option is used to look up a description of a known DTC. 1. Use the key to move the cursor under the required DTC character, then using the and keys, change the characters as required. 2. Press the key to confirm DTC. 3. Press to return to the User Menu. If the unit recognises the DTC, the screen will display the full description, i.e. P0100 - Mass or Volume Air Flow 'A' Circuit. Where more that one description is available, a separate menu will appear for you to select the appropriate option. If a code is not recognised the message 'No Text Allocated for this Code' is displayed. NOTE: Press to return to the User Menu.

Language Menu
The language menu allows you to change the software language if available. 1. Use the and keys to select the required language. 2. Press to confirm the selection. NOTE: This menu is only enabled when more than one language is installed on the OmiCheck. If only one language is installed, the message 'Not Enabled' will be displayed when the Language Menu option is selected and the display will return to the User Menu.

255

User Menu
Tester Setup
The tester setup allows you to change the live data units or change the way live data is displayed. 1. Select 'Live Data Units' from the Tester Setup menu.
LIVE DATA UNITS 1. 2. 3. Metric Units Imperial Units American Units

2. The currently selected live data units will be displayed on the screen. e.g. 'Metric Units set', before displaying the available options. 3. Use the and keys to select the preferred units of measurement and confirm by pressing the key. After updating, the unit returns to the Tester Setup menu. 4. Select 'Live Data Display' from the Tester Setup menu.
LIVE DATA DISPLAY 1. 2. Normal Text Abbreviations

5. The currently selected live data display option will appear on the screen, e.g. 'Normal Text Set', before displaying the available options. 6. Use the and keys to select the preferred display option and confirm by pressing the key. After updating, the unit returns to the Tester Setup menu

256

User Menu
Self Test
SELF TEST MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Run Self Test Flash Test Memory Test IIC Memory Test Vehicle Com Test PWM J1850 Test VPW J1850 Test CAN Comms Test Key Pad Test Display Test Display All Char Print All Data

1. 2. 3. 4.

Use the and keys to select the required test. Press to confirm selection. Follow on-screen instructions to carry out specified test. Press the or key as appropriate, to return to the Self Test Menu.

Software Version
1. Once selected, the OmiCheck version number appears on the screen before displaying a list of all software modules, including version numbers, currently loaded onto the OmiCheck. 2. Use the and keys to scroll through the software module list. 3. Press the or key to return to the User Menu.

257

User Menu
Security
Most of the applications on the OmiCheck are 'locked' by a security key. To unlock a particular application the appropriate security key must be obtained from Omitec Limited and entered into the OmiCheck. If the expected applications are not displayed in the main menu it could be that the security key has not been entered, or is incorrect. To examine or enter a security key, enter the Security option. The following menu will be displayed:
SECURITY 1. 2. 3. Show SecurityKey Enter SecurityKey Unit Serial No.

Show SecurityKey
1. Once selected, the security key is displayed on the screen as 20 characters. If it is incorrect the message 'Key is Invalid' will be displayed as well, and the key may be pressed for further information which may be asked for by product support. 2. Press the or key to return to the User Menu.

Enter SecurityKey
This option is used to enter the security key to unlock the application loaded on the OmiCheck. 1. Select 'Enter SecurityKey' from the security menu. 2. Using the and keys, scroll through the alpha/numerical character list. key. 3. Confirm each character by pressing the

4. If you make a mistake use the key and enter the correct character. To re-enter the code from the beginning, press the key. 5. When prompted to verify the security key, press to confirm. 6. Restart the OmiCheck either by disconnecting and reconnecting the power supply or by pressing the outer 4 buttons on the handset at the same time. Note: The button displays on-screen instructions. The cancel the operation and the original key will be retained. button may be used to

258

User Menu
Unit Serial No.
1. Once selected, the serial number of the OmiCheck is displayed on the screen. This should match the number on the back of the unit. The serial number may be requested by product support when issuing security numbers. The user cannot change this number. 2. Press the key to return to the User Menu.

259

Appendix A: Glossary
Glossary

Glossary of terms
Term 4WAS 4X4M AAG AAM ABS A/C AC ACM AFCM AIR ALWRS (Left) ARC ART A/T SAP B+ BARO BNS CAC CARB CCM_GEM CDP CFI CL CKP CKP REF CM CMP CMP REF CO CO2 CPP Description 4 Wheel Air Suspension 4X4 Control Module Trailer Connection Unit All Activity Module Anti-Lock Brake / Traction Control Module Air Conditioning Air Cleaner Audio Control Module Alternative Fuel Control Module Secondary Air Injection Headlamp Range adjustment - Left Automatic Ride Control Intelligent cruise control Automatic Transmission or Transaxle Accelerator Pedal Battery positive voltage Barometric Pressure Vehicle Power Supply Control Module Charge Air Cooler Californian Air Resources Board Generic electric module Compact Disc Player Continuous Fuel Injection or Central Fuel Injection Closed Loop Crankshaft Position Sensor Crankshaft Reference Control Module Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Reference Carbon Monoxide Carbon Dioxide Clutch Pedal Position

ALWRM (Right) Headlamp Range adjustment - Right

260

Appendix A: Glossary
CSM CTM CTOX CTP DCSM DDM DEPS DFCO DFDM DFI DFSM DLC DRDM DSM DTC DTM EAMK EATC EBCM EBTCM EC ECM ECL ECS ECT EEPROM EFE EGR EGRT EGS EI EM EOBD EPB EPROM EPS Central Security Module Central Timer Module Continuous Trap Oxidizer Closed Throttle Position Driver Climate-Control Seat Module Drivers Door Module Digital Engine Position Sensor Decel Fuel Cut-off Mode Driver Door Control Unit Direct Fuel Injection Driver Front Seat Module Data Link Connector Rear Left Door Control Unit Drivers Seat Module Diagnostic Trouble Code Diagnostic Test Mode Extended Activity Module Electronic Automatic Temperature Control Electronic Brake Control Module Electronic Brake Traction Control Module Engine Control Engine Control Module Engine Coolant Level Electronic Crash Sensor (Airbag) Engine Coolant Temperature Electrically Erasable Programmable Read only Memory Early Fuel Evaporation Exhaust Gas Re-circulation EGR Temperature Electronic Transmission System Electronic Ignition Engine Modification European On-Board Diagnostics Electric Parking Brake Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Electronic-Controlled Power Steering

261

Appendix A: Glossary
ESV (Driver) ESV (Passenger) EVAP EWM FACM FBM FC FEEPROM FEM FF FFH FICM FIM FOH FP FPROM FSSM FT FTP GCM GDM GEM GEN GND H2O HO2S HO2S1 HO2S2 HO2S3 HC HCM HEC HVS HVAC IA Drivers Electronic Seat Adjustment Passenger Electronic Seat Adjustment Evaporative Emission System Electronic Gear Selection Fuel Additive Control Module Drive Authorization Module Fan Control Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Front Electronic Module Flexible Fuel Fuel Fired Coolant Heating Module Fuel Injection Control Module Fuel Indication Module Fuel Operated Heater Fuel Pump Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Fire Suppression System Module Fuel Trim Federal Test Procedure Governor Control Module Generic Display Module Generic Electronic Module Generator Ground Water Heated Oxygen Sensor Upstream Heated Oxygen Sensor Up or Downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor Downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor Hydrocarbon Headlamp Control Module Hybrid Electronic Cluster High Voltage Switch Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning system Intake Air

262

Appendix A: Glossary
IABM IAC IAT IC IC ICM ICU IF1/IF2/FFZ IFI IFS I/M INST IPC ISC ISU J1962 KFB KI KOEC KOEO KOER KS KSM LCM LHID LPSDM LT LWR MAF MAP MC MC MDP MFI MFSW MIL Integrated Air Bag Module Idle Air Control Intake Air Temperature Ignition Control Circuit Instrument Cluster (Ford) Ignition Control Module Injector Control Unit IR / RF Remote controlled central locking Indirect Fuel Injection Inertia Fuel Shut-off Inspection/Maintenance Instrument cluster Instrument Panel Cluster Idle Speed Control Central junction box The SAE standard that defines the 16-pin connector used for EOBD Convenience Feature Instrument Cluster Key On, Engine Cranking Key On, Engine Off Key On, Engine Running Knock Sensor Knock Sensor Module Lighting Control Module Left High Intensity Discharge Lamp Left Power Sliding Door Module Long Term Fuel Trim Headlamp Range adjustment Mass Airflow Sensor Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor Message Center Module Mixture Control (Ford) Manifold Differential Pressure Multi-port Fuel Injection Multifunction Steering Wheel Malfunction Indicator Lamp

263

Appendix A: Glossary
MPH MST MVZ MY NAV NGSC NVRAM NOX O2S OBD OBD I OBD-II OC OCS OTC OL OSC PAIR PAM PARKTRONIC PATS PCM PCSM PCV PDM PNP PRB PRDM PROM PSA PSE PSP PTOX RAM RAP RASM miles per hour Manifold Surface Temperature Manifold Vacuum Zone Model Year Navigation Controller Next Generation Speed Control Module Non-Volatile Random Access Memory Oxides of Nitrogen Oxygen Sensor On-Board Diagnostics On-Board Diagnostics generation one On-Board Diagnostics, second generation Oxidation Catalyst Occupant Classification System Module Overhead Trip Computer Open Loop Oxygen Sensor Storage Pulsed Secondary Air Injection Parking Aid Module Parking Aid / Parking Assist Passive Anti-Theft System Powertrain Control Module Passenger Climate-Control Seat Module Positive Crankcase Ventilation Passengers Door Control Unit Park/Neutral switch Power Running Board Rear Right Door Control Unit Program Read Only Memory Pressure Switch Assembly Pneumatic Equipment System Power Steering Pressure Periodic Trap Oxidizer Random Access Memory Remote Anti-Theft / Personality Module Rear Air Suspension Module

264

Appendix A: Glossary
RCC RCM REM RETM RHID RKE RM RPSDM ROM RPM SAMB SAMF/SAMV SAMH SC SCB OmiCheck SDARS SDM SFI SRI SRM SRT SSGB (Passenger) SSGF (Driver) ST TB TBC TBI TC TCC TCM TFP TP TPM TPS Remote Climate Control (Air Conditioning) Restraint Control Module Rear Electronic Module Rear Seat Entertainment Module Right High Intensity Discharge Lamp Remote Keyless Entry Relay Module Right Power Sliding Door Module Read Only Memory revolutions per minute Signal Acquisition and Control module Passenger side Signal Acquisition and Control module Front/Driver side Signal Acquisition and Control module Rear Supercharger Supercharger Bypass OmiPro/OmiCheck Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System Sensing Diagnostic Mode Sequential Fuel Injection Service Reminder Indicator Speech Recognition Module System Readiness Test Passengers Seat Position Memory Drivers Seat Position Memory Short Term Fuel Trim Throttle Body Trailer Brake Control Module Throttle Body Injection Turbocharger Torque Converter Clutch Transmission or Transaxle Control Module Throttle Fluid Pressure Throttle Position Tire Pressure Monitor Throttle Position Sensor

265

Appendix A: Glossary
TVV TWC TWC+OC VAF VAPS VCM VDM VR VS VSM VSS WU-TWC WOT Thermal Vacuum Valve Three Way Catalyst Three Way + Oxidation Catalytic Converter Volume Airflow Variable Assist Power Steering Vehicle Control Module Vehicle Dynamics Module Voltage Regulator Vehicle Sensor Vehicle Security Module Vehicle Speed Sensor Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter Wide Open Throttle

266

Appendix B: Cables
Cables

Cable Identification

OM3000/10 - J1962/EOBD cable

CR0234
OG2012 - Peugeot/Citroen PSA 2 pin cable

267

Appendix B: Cables

CR0231
OG2013 - PSA 30 pin cable

CR0230
OC2022 - VAG cable

268

Appendix B: Cables

OM1572

OG2024 - Land Rover Lucas 14CUX cable

CR0227
OG2009 - Sprinter lead

269

Appendix B: Cables

CR0228
OG2002 - BMW cable

CR0235

OG2023 - Fiat/Alfa Romeo/Lancia

270

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Diagnostic Connector Locations

Diagnostic Connector Locations

Audi 80, 100, 200 (to 1991) & V8: 2-pin Dashboard - Driver side. ISO 9141 100 (from 1991): - Dashboard - or J1962 passenger side. A4: - Passenger ashtray - Rear Centre. A6 (to mid 1994): - Relay box Engine compartment. A8: - Dashboard - Centre.

16

OM1038

Alfa Romeo

Generally 16 pin J1962 J1962 connectors are found under the drivers side dashboard or in the fuse box.

271

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Alfa Romeo 3 Pin Connectors EMS Engine compartment normally centre: 145, 146, 155 Engine compartment normally right: 33 Engine compartment normally left: 146 Front door post bottom: 155, 164 Under dashboard passenger side or in fuse box: GTV/Spider Airbag/ABS Engine compartment normally centre: 145, 146, 155, GTV/Spider Engine compartment normally right: 145, 146, 155, 164, GTV/ Spider Under dashboard drivers side: 147,156,166,GTV/Spider Passenger glove box: 145, 146, GTV/Spider 3-pin

272

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

BMW The vehicle's diagnostic connector (20-pin round connector) is always found in the engine compartment. If the vehicle is fitted with a J1962 diagnostic connector, this can usually be located in the driver's footwell behind a cover. NOTE: If the BMW vehicle under test has both the round (20 pin) diagnostic connector and the J1962 (16 pin) connector, the round connector should always be used to access information via the BMW application and the J1962 connector should be used to access data via the EOBD application (ensure the cap is fitted to the 20-pin connector). If the cap is not fitted, the J1962 connector will not function correctly.
20-pin round connector or J1962

273

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Citroen The vehicle's diagnostic connector (J1962 16-pin) can be found in the following locations: AX (1997), Berlingo I: - Under dashboard - driver's side C1: - Under dashboard, drivers side to left of steering column. C2, C3I, C8, Dispatch, Evasion, Jumpy, Xantia, Xsara, Xsara Picasso: - Divers side, fascia fuse box. C3 II: - Passenger glove box, fuse compartment. C4 / C4 Picasso: - Centre console storage behind ashtray. C5 I / C5 II: - Compartment inside passengers glovebox C6: - Rear centre console glovebox under plastic matting. Saxo: - Under dashboard passenger side. The vehicle's diagnostic connector (2-pin) can be found in the following locations: AX, BX (to 1995), C15, Jumper, Relay, XM, ZX (to 1997): Engine compartment near suspension turret or battery. BX (1996 on), ZX (1997 on): Engine compartment fusebox. The vehicle's diagnostic connector (30-pin) can be found in the following locations: Berlingo I, Evasion, Synergie: - Under dashboard, driver's side. Dispatch, Jumpy, Xantia, XM: Drivers side, fascia fuse box. Saxo: - Passenger side - under dashboard, passenger door end.
30-pin connector or 2-pin connector
OM0977

Fiat

J1962 Generally 16 pin J1962 connectors are found under the drivers side dashboard or in the fuse box with the exception of the Palio/RST where it is in the centre console, under the handbrake.

274

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Fiat
3-pin 3 Pin Connectors EMS Engine compartment normally centre: Barchetta, Bravo-Brava, Marea, Palio, Premio, Punto, Tempra Engine compartment normally right: Cinquecento, Palio RST, Seicento Engine compartment normally left/Centre Console Under Ashtray: Coupe, Fiorino, Panda, Punto, Scudo, Tempra, Tipo, Uno Engine compartment near battery: Ducato Front door post bottom: Croma, Panda, Tempra Under dashboard passenger side: Tipo, Uno Airbag/ABS Under dashboard drivers side/passenger glove box: Barchetta, Bravo-Brava, Coupe, Doblo, Ducato, Idea, Marea, Multipla, Palio, Panda, Punto, Seicento, Stilo Engine compartment normally right: Bravo-Brava, Croma, Ducato, Marea, Palio, Punto, Seicento Engine compartment normally centre: Bravo-Brava, Croma

275

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Ford
J1962 or EEC V Ford EEC The vehicle's diagnostic IV cable connector (J1962 16-pin) can usually be found in one of the following locations: Courier, Fiesta, Ka: Passenger compartment bottom of 'A' pillar. Focus, Mondeo, Scorpio: Central junction box - below steering column. Galaxy: - Behind ashtray- centre console. Transit: - Passenger compartment fuse box - behind spare fuse tray. Puma: - Passenger side bottom of 'A' pillar. Cougar: - Under dash panel centre.

EEC IV - DCL Use the Ford EECIV cable as specified in the application list. The vehicle diagnostic connect (J1962 16 pin) can usually be located: Escort: - Passenger compartment - bottom of 'A' pillar. Mondeo: - Below steering column. The 2-pin connector is usually located: Escort: - Black connector with a red dust cover - engine compartment over wheel arch. Battery clips (OM100/16 & OM100/17) will also be required for power.

276

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

GM Vauxhall/ Opel
J1962 The vehicles diagnostic connector (J1962 16-pin) can be connector found in the following locations: Corsa C, Astra G, Astra H, Meriva, Vectra B, Zafira A, Zafira B: - Below cover - front of handbrake. Agila, Tigra, Speedster/VX220, Sintra, Vivaro: Below dashboard - drivers side. Astra F, Corsa B, Omega B: Fuse box - passenger compartment. Corsa C, Corsa D: - Centre console - below heater controls. Frontera, Vectra C, Signum: Centre console - under ashtray. The vehicle's diagnostic connector (10-pin) can be found in the following locations: Asona C, Astra, Belmont, Calibra, Carlton, Cavalier, Kadette, Omega A, Vectra A: Under bonnet - near suspension turret. Astra, Corsa A, Nova, Tigra: Fuse box - passenger compartment.

Innocenti

Bosch Motronic Next to ECU in the engine bay on wheel arch: Elba: - (1.4 & 1.6 I.E) IAW Marelli Next to the ECU under dashboard passenger side or engine bay next to fuse box: Mille: - (1.0 I.E)

3-pin connector or J1962

Lancia

J1962 Generally 16 pin J1962 connectors are found under the drivers side dashboard or in the fuse box with the exception of the Phedra where it is in the drivers side footwell.

277

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Lancia
3-pin 3 Pin Connectors EMS Engine compartment normally centre: Delta Engine compartment normally left: Dedra, Y, Y10 Front door post bottom: Dedra, Delta, Thema, Y10 Under dashboard driver side or in fuse box: K Airbag/ABS Engine compartment normally right: Dedra, Delta Nuova, Thema, Y Under dashboard drivers side: K/Coupe, Lybra, Musa, Thesis, Ypsilon Passenger glove box: K, Y In the tunnel or under gearbox lever: Delta Nuova J1962 or The vehicles diagnostic connector (J1962 connector) for Lucas 14CUX the engine and ABS management systems is located either on one side of the centre console or inside the passenger footwell. For the Lucas 14CUX system a 5 pin connector is located in the drivers side footwell next to the accelerator pedal. For connection to the Lucas CUX system, the Land Rover 5 pin harness SB159/11 should be used.

Land Rover

278

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Mazda The Mazda diagnostic connector J1962 is generally located on the left side of the engine bay, however the diagnostic connector on MX 5 models is located near the brake master cylinder. The J1962 is located in the drivers footwell under fascia.
38-pin round connector or J1962 or 14-pin round connector (Sprinter)

Mercedes Engine compartment - usually Benz along bulkhead, but the precise location may vary. Driver's footwell under the steering column or the centre console beneath a removable panel. Passenger's footwell under fascia behind removable cover. NOTE: For those vehicles which have both the round 38-pin connector and the OBD II connector: The round 38-pin connector should always be used to retrieve data via the Mercedes application. The OBD II connector should always be used only to retrieve data via the OBD II application. Some Mercedes vans have a 14-pin round connector which is located under the passenger side dashboard, other vehicles may have the 16-pin OBD II connector. The 14 pin round connector should always be used to retrieve data via the Mercedes application. It does not support OBD II.

3 7 11 14

1 4 8 12

OM0973

279

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

J1962 MG Rover PGMFI There is no diagnostic connector for the PGMFI supported systems. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) can be found on the ECM (Engine Control Module) which is located under the drivers seat. There are two LEDs on the ECM. The red one is used for fault code retrieval. MEMS 1.6 SPi and MPi The MEMS 1.6. SPi and MPi diagnostic connector is located on the LH inner wing. MEMS 1.9, MEMS 2J, RC5, EC5 and TRW SPS The diagnostic connector is located in one of three positions: Behind the A post lower trim panel in the drivers footwell. On a bracket inside the centre console. The connector is often mounted on a bracket so that it faces into the console. If this is the case, the J1962 socket needs to be removed from the bracket before connection can be made. To remove the diagnostic socket, squeeze together the two wings on the back of the socket and carefully pull the connector free from the bracket. Early MGF: - The J1962 connector is located inside a trim panel by the steering wheel just above the internal fuse box. NOTE: The MEMS 1.9 systems require the use of a dongle which is to be connected in-line with the standard J1962 (16-pin) cable. The MEMS 1.6 systems require the use of a lead specifically designed for those systems.

280

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Nissan
J1962 The J1962 16-pin diagnostic connector can be found in the following locations: Micra: - Drivers footwell. Almera / Almera Tino: - Under the fascia. Primera: - Fascia fuse box NOTE: For vehicles fitted with J1962 standard connector, terminals IGN (PIN-8) and CHK (PIN-1) must be bridged out.

281

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Peugeot
J1962 The vehicle's diagnostic connector (J1962 16-pin) can be found in the following locations: 106: - Passenger side, under dashboard passenger door end. 107: - Under dashboard, drivers side, to left of steering column. 206, 306, 806, Partner (1997 on): - Under dashboard - driver's side. 307, 406 (1997 - 2000), 807, Expert I: - Drivers side, fascia fuse box. 307 II: - Centre console storage tray behind rubber mat insert and ash tray. 308: - Compartment inside passengers glovebox. 406 (2000 - 2004): - Driver's side dashboard (remove small plastic cover). 407, 607: - Rear centre console glovebox. The vehicle's diagnostic connector (2-pin) can be found in the following locations: 106 (to 1996): - Engine compartment - under ECU. 205, 309: - Engine compartment - near suspension turret or battery. 205, 309: - Engine compartment - near suspension turret or battery. 306, 605: - Engine compartment - near battery. 405: - Engine compartment - in relay box. Boxer: - Engine compartment near suspension turret. The vehicle's diagnostic connector (30-pin) can be found in the following locations: 106 (to 1997): - Passenger side - below dash. 406 (to 1997), 605, Expert I: Drivers side fascia fuse box. 806, Partner: - Under dashboard, driver's side.

282

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Renault
J1962 The J1962 16-pin diagnostic connectors can be found in the following locations: Clio: - Under ashtray - centre console. Espace: - Passenger footwell. Kangoo: - Driver footwell. Laguna: - Centre console - in front of gear lever. Laguna 2: - Centre console under ashtray. Megane: - Driver footwell. Safrane: - Engine compartment - Near side front wing. Scenic: - Driver footwell. The vehicle's 12-pin diagnostic connectors can be found in the following locations: 5,9 and 11: - Next to battery and ignition coil. 21: - Centre of engine bulk housing. 21 (alternate location): - Engine compartment - Near side front wing. Super 5 Express: - Engine compartment - Near side front wing. 25: - Near side engine bulk housing. Clio Classic: - Fuse box passenger footwell. Espace: - Under bonnet - front centre. Twingo: - Under bonnet - front centre. 19: - Inside glove compartment. Laguna: - Inside glove compartment - Near side front wing.

Saab

Drivers footwell, under the steering column.

J1962

283

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations

Seat Alhambra: - Centre console/ Footwell - Passenger. Arosa: - Fascia - Driver side. Ibiza, Cordoba: - Centre console - Driver side. Toledo: - Centre console.
J1962

Skoda

Favourit, Felicia (1.3), Forman: J1962 - Under bonnet - Suspension turret - Near side. Felicia (1.6): - Footwell Passenger side. Octavia: - Storage compartment - Drivers side. S/V40: - Under dashboard drivers side. S/V/C70: - Behind handbrake. 850: - In front of gear lever. 960: - Next to hand brake.
J1962

Volvo

VW

2-pin Bora: - Centre console. Corrado, Passat: - Dashboard - ISO 9141 or J1962 Centre. Golf, Vento: - Dashboard Centre (remove ashtray). Lupo: - Centre console, Storage compartment or Front ashtray. Polo: - Dashboard - RH. Sharan: - Under gear lever cover. Transporter: - Adjacent to instrument panel or Fuse/relay box - Fascia. NOTE: For more information, refer to the relevant technical manual.

284

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Manual Service Reset

Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

On some older vehicles it is not possible to reset the SRI by using the OmiCheck. The manufacturers of these vehicles generally have bespoke service reset tools specifically for this task. However on a number of vehicles, it is possible to reset the SRI via interfaces built into the vehicle. The following are some of the most common SRI manual reset procedures.

Alfa Romeo
(1994 - 2000)

OM1104

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition key to OFF. Press button A and keep it pressed. Turn the ignition key to ON. Keep button A pressed for about 10 seconds. The display will show 0 and the spanner symbol will disappear.

Alfa Romeo 156

1. Switch the Ignition ON. 2. Press the [INFO] button on the dashboard to enter the dashboard functions menu. 3. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the SERVICE option and press [INFO] to select. 4. Hold down both the [+] and [-] buttons for at least 10 seconds. 5. The Number of Miles to Service should now be reset to approximately 12500 miles. 6. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the END MENU option and press [MODE] to exit the functions menu. 7. Switch Ignition OFF.

285

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Audi
Audi A4 and A6 (1995 - 1999)

E UNLEADED F FUEL ONLY

60 6 7

80
ABS

100

OK
18.8F 0.0 MPG
PRN 432

40 20 0
B

60

AIR BAG

A
OM1029

1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press and hold button A whilst turning the key to the ON position. 2. The message Service OIL will appear. If the message does not display, repeat step 1. 3. Pull out the button B until the message is extinguished. 4. The display should now show Service ---, indicating that the SRI has been reset.

286

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

BMW
BMW 3 Series (E46), BMW 7 Series (E38), BMW 5 Series (E39) and BMW X5 (E53)

BMW X3 (E83) and BMW Z4 (E85)

OM1347

Button A arrowed in illustrations

The Service Interval Display (SIA) can be reset using the reset button for the trip distance recorder on the instrument cluster NOTE: The distance-based inspection can only be reset if approximately 10 litres of fuel have been used since the previous reset was performed. The time-based inspection can only be reset if approximately 20 days have passed since the previous reset was performed 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Keep button depressed and switch the ignition to position I. Keep button depressed for 5 seconds, until the service status is displayed. The display will now indicate the remaining distance to service and the type of service required (OIL SERVICE or INSPECTION). If the remaining distance is displayed with rSt then the service interval can be reset. 6. To reset the distance to service limit press button A for 5 seconds. The rSt (or reset) will flash on the display. If the reset is not required then wait until the rSt (or reset) has stopped flashing before continuing. To reset press button A again before 'rSt' has flashed 5 times to reset the service distance limit. The new distance to service will be displayed for 5 seconds.

287

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

NOTE: For vehicles that do not include time-based inspection then End SIA will be displayed with the remaining distance until the next service. For vehicles that do include time-based inspection then the time-based inspection status will be shown. 7. The display will now indicate the remaining time to service. If the remaining time is displayed with rSt then the service interval can be reset. 8. To reset the time to service limit press button A for 5 seconds. The rSt (or reset) will flash on the display. If the reset is not required then wait until the rSt (or reset) has stopped flashing before continuing. To reset press button A again before 'rSt' has flashed 5 times to reset the service time limit. The new time to service will be displayed for 5 seconds. 9. The End SIA will now be displayed with the remaining time until the next service.

288

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Citroen
Berlingo 1999 - 2002

MPH
km/h

OM1053

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

Berlingo 2002 onwards

km/h

OM1054

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

289

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

C3

OM1046

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed until the display reads 0 and the spanner icon extinguishes.

C5
A

OM1050

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

290

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

C8

STOP +/OM1052

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed until the display reads 0 and the spanner icon extinguishes.

Dispatch/Jumpy

OM1051

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

291

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Relay II/Jumper II (2002 onwards)

rpm x 100

A
OM1055

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

Saxo

OM1045

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

292

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Synergie/Evasion

OM1051

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

Xantia

A
47673

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed. The spanner icon and the service interval will illuminate for 5 seconds, then extinguish.

293

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Xsara (1997 - 2000)

OM1047

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed. The spanner icon and the service interval will illuminate for 5 seconds, then extinguish.

Xsara (2000 onwards)

OM1047

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

294

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Xsara Picasso

OM1048

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

295

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Fiat
(1994 - 2000)

OM1104

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition key to OFF. Press button A and keep it pressed. Turn the ignition key to ON. Keep button A pressed for about 10 seconds. The display will show 0 and the spanner symbol will disappear.

296

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Ford
Transit (2000)
To turn out the Service light (spanner symbol) perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Hold down the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal. Turn the ignition key to ON, while still holding the two pedals down. Keep the pedals pressed for at least 15 seconds. The SIA indicator (spanner) will flash when reset is complete. Release pedals while SIA indictor is flashing. Switch ignition OFF.

Galaxy (2000 - 2006)

mph
STOP
km/h

OM1059

1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 2. Press button A and keep it pressed, until the display SERVICE is cleared. 3. Turn the ignition key to OFF. NOTE Depending on the type of service the procedure may need to be performed 1, 2, or 3 times: OEL (Oil Change Service) - Every 7,500 Miles / 12,000 Kilometres = 1. IN 01 (Inspection Service) - Every 15,000 Miles / 24,000 Kilometres = 2. IN 02 (Additional Servicing Work) - Every 30,000 Miles / 48,000 Kilometres = 3.

297

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

GM Vauxhall/Opel
Omega-B, Vectra-B 1999 onwards

A
OM1268

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed until three dashes are displayed '---'. Switch ignition OFF to check the service request has been cleared.

298

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Lancia
(1994 - 2000)

OM1104

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition key to OFF. Press button A and keep it pressed. Turn the ignition key to ON. Keep button A pressed for about 10 seconds. The display will show 0 and the spanner symbol will disappear.

299

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Land Rover
Range Rover III 2002 onwards (All Except Japan and NAS)

A
OM1257

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8.

9.

10. 11.

12.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Keep button depressed and switch the ignition to position I. Keep button depressed for 5 seconds, until the 'SIA RESET' appears. The display will now indicate the distance to service and the type of service required (OIL SERVICE or INSPECTION). Check the distance to service has been reached. a. If yes, proceed to step 9 b. If no, proceed to next step Press button A once. The display will show the date to service. Check the service date has been reached. a. If yes, proceed to step 11 b. If no, proceed to step 10 When the distance to service limit has been reached, press button A for 5 seconds. 'RESET' will flash on the display. Press button A again before 'RESET' has flashed 5 times to reset the service distance limit. The new distance to service will be displayed for 5 seconds before the service date is displayed. Press button A once to end the service interval check and reset. When the date for service limit has been reached, press and hold button A for 5 seconds. 'RESET will flash on the display. Press button A again before 'RESET' has flashed 5 times to reset the service date limit. The new date to service will be displayed for 5 seconds before end service is displayed. Switch ignition OFF.

300

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Mercedes
Mercedes (1998 - 2007) With the Flexible Service System and Multi-Function Steering Wheel Controls
1. Switch ignition ON. 2. Use buttons and to scroll through the multi-function display until the trip odometer and main odometer readings are displayed, or in the case of a separate main odometer display, scroll until the exterior temperature is displayed. 3. Use buttons and to scroll through the multifunction display until the service indicator or is displayed. 4. Press and hold button on the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds, until the following question is displayed within the multifunction display: DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? CONFIRM BY PRESSING R
or

SERVICE INTERVAL? RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC 5. Press and hold button on the instrument cluster again, until a signal sounds. 6. The new service interval will appear in the multifunction display. NOTE: The refers to the trip distance reset button.

Mercedes (1998 - 2002) With the Flexible Service System and Without Multi-Function Steering Wheel Controls
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and then immediately press the button next to the digital display twice within one second. The current status for days or distance will be displayed. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position within 10 seconds. 3. Press and hold the button while turning the ignition switch to the ON position. The status for days or distance will be displayed again. 4. After approximately 10 seconds you will hear a confirmation chime and the display will show 10,000 miles (15,000 km). Release the button.

301

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Peugeot
106

OM1056

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

206

km/h

OM1057

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

302

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

306

OM1058

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

307

mph
STOP
km/h

OM1059

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

303

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

406

km/h

OM1060

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

607

km/h

OM1061

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

304

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

806

OM1062

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

807

STOP +/OM1063

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed until the display reads 0 and the spanner icon extinguishes.

305

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Boxer II 2002 onwards

rpm x 100

A
OM1066

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

Expert

OM1062

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

306

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Partner 1999 - 2002

MPH
km/h

OM1064

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

Partner 2002 onwards

km/h

OM1065

1. 2. 3. 4.

Switch ignition OFF. Press and hold button A. Switch ignition ON. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. The display will now read 0 and the spanner icon will extinguish.

307

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Renault
Oil level

km/h

km

OM1067

The lamp illustrated is an oil level low warning indicator and not a service interval indicator. When the engine oil is at the correct level, this lamp will automatically extinguish.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

km/h

SERV
OM1068

km/h

SERVICE

OM1069

The lamps illustrated above, are Malfunction Indicator Lamps (MIL) and not service interval indicators. When illuminated there is a problem with the vehicle. Refer to manufacturers documentation for further information.

308

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Clio III (models with trip computer; 2006 onwards) Scenic II (models with trip computer; 2003 onwards)

A,B

OM1384

1. Switch ignition ON. 2. Press and release display reset button A or B on the tip of the wiper lever until the Distance Before Next service information is displayed. 3. Continue to depress the button for 10 seconds until the display shows the distance to next service permanently. The indicator will then show the appropriate service interval (e.g. 6000 miles/10000 km). 4. Release the reset button. 5. Switch ignition OFF.

Laguna (models with trip computer; 1994 - 1998)

OM1070

1. Switch ignition ON. 2. Press reset button A until spanner icon flashes. 3. Continue to depress the button until the spanner icon stops flashing and remains illuminated. The indicator will show the appropriate service interval (e.g. 6000 miles/10000 km). 4. Release the reset button. 5. Switch ignition OFF.

309

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Laguna II (2001 onwards)

B A

OM1071

1. Switch ignition ON. 2. Repeatedly press reset button A until spanner icon flashes and the distance remaining until the next service appears in the odometer display. 3. Press and hold button B until the display has flashed 8 times. 4. Release button B. The new service interval is now displayed. 5. Switch ignition OFF.

Megane II (models with trip computer; 2003 onwards)

OM1385

1. Switch ignition ON. 2. Press and release display reset button A on the tip of the wiper lever until the service information is displayed. 3. Press button B for 10 seconds until the display shows the next service interval permanently. The indicator will then show the appropriate distance before the next service (e.g. 6000 miles/10000 km). 4. Release the reset button. 5. Switch ignition OFF.

310

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Safrane

OM1073

1. Press and hold button A. 2. Switch ignition ON. 3. Continue to depress the button until the spanner icon stops flashing and remains illuminated. The indicator will show the appropriate service interval (e.g. 6000 miles/10000 km). 4. Release the reset button. 5. Switch ignition OFF.

311

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Vel Satis

OM1072

1. Switch ignition ON. 2. Repeatedly press reset button A until spanner icon flashes and the distance remaining until the next service appears in the odometer display. 3. Press and hold button B until the display has flashed 8 times. 4. Release button B. The new service interval is now displayed. 5. Switch ignition OFF.

312

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Smart
Roadster
Service Type
Service A Service B

Symbol
One Spanner Displayed Two Spanners Displayed

OM1105

1. Turn the ignition ON and within 4 seconds select the service interval display by pressing button A on the top of the instrument cluster (repeatedly until the service interval is displayed). 2. Hold button A down and turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON. 4. With button A held down turn the ignition ON and wait for 10 seconds. The service indicator will now be reset. 5. Release button A, the type and distance to the next service will be shown.

313

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Volkswagen
Cabrio, Golf III, GTi, Jetta III (1993 - 1995) and Jetta (1996)
One of four service codes may be displayed on instrument panel according to distance travelled. Each service code displayed determines the type or level of maintenance required. The service code will flash for approximately 3 seconds in odometer display window as the ignition is turned on. When servicing becomes due (every 7,500 miles), the appropriate service code will flash for approximately 60 seconds. The four service codes available for display are as follows: IN 00 (No Service Necessary) OEL (Oil Change Service) - Every 7,500 Miles IN 01 (Inspection Service) - Every 15,000 Miles IN 02 (Additional Servicing Work) - Every 30,000 Miles After performing the required maintenance, each effected service code displayed must be reset individually. For example, at 15,000 miles service codes OEL and IN 01 will both need to be reset.

A
OM1030

1. To reset the SRI, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Press and hold the odometer reset button A. Whilst holding button A, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Service code OEL will be displayed. To reset this counter, press and hold button B until 5 dashes appear on the display. 4. If necessary, press the button A to display IN 01. To reset this counter, press and hold button B until 5 dashes appear on the display. 5. If necessary, press the button A to display IN 02. To reset this counter, press and hold button B until 5 dashes appear on the display. 6. To exit reset mode, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 7. When IN 00 is displayed, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

314

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Volvo
Volvo 240 (1986 - 1989)
0 7 0
SERVICE

km/h

MPH

120
PARKING BRAKE

OM1032

1. Reach behind the instrument panel and push the lever located between the tachometer and the speedometer.

Volvo 240 (1990 - 1993)

30
9 3
40

20
20

10
6

km/h

005000
mph

OM1033

1. Remove the plug from the face of the instrument panel between the clock and the speedometer. 2. Insert a thin-bladed tool into the cavity and press the reset button.

315

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Volvo 740 (1986 - 1988)
9 6
service

3
005000

km/h

mph

OM1031

1. Reach behind the instrument panel and push the button located to the left of the speedometer.

Volvo 740 (1989 - 1992)

30
9 3
40

20
20

10
6

km/h

005000
mph

OM1033

1. Remove the plug from the face of the instrument panel between the clock and the speedometer. 2. Insert a thin-bladed tool into the cavity and press the reset button.

316

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Volvo 760 (1986 - 1990)
30
9 3
40

20
20

10
6

km/h

005000
mph

OM1033

1. Remove the plug from the face of the instrument panel between the clock and the speedometer. 2. Insert a thin-bladed tool into the cavity and press the reset button.

Volvo 780 (1988 - 1990)

9 6
service

3
005000

km/h

mph

OM1031

1. Reach behind the instrument panel and push the button located to the left of the speedometer.

317

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

Volvo 850 (1993 - 1995) fitted with the Yazaki instrument panel
NOTE: This instrument panel has the odometer located above the speedometer needle.

30
9 3
40

20
20

10
6

km/h

005000
mph

OM1033

1. Remove the plug from the face of the instrument panel between the clock and the speedometer. 2. Insert a thin-bladed tool into the cavity and press the reset button.

Volvo 850 (1993 - 1995) fitted with the VDO instrument panel
NOTE: This instrument panel has the odometer located below the speedometer needle. 1. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine not running.

7
6
5

3
2
1

OM1034

Diagnostic module located in engine compartment adjacent to LH suspension mount

2. Connect the diagnostic module test lead to terminal 7. 3. Press the reset button on the diagnostic module 4 times in quick succession.

318

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset

4. When the LED on the diagnostic unit illuminates and stays illuminated, press the reset button once and release it. 5. When the LED illuminates and stays illuminated, press the button 5 times in quick succession. 6. When the LED illuminates again, press the button once. 7. The LED will flash several times to indicate that the sequence has been correctly entered and the SRI has been reset. 8. Unplug the test lead from terminal 7 and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Volvo 940 (1991 - 1995)

30
9 3
40

20
20

10
6

km/h

005000
mph

OM1033

1. Remove the plug from the face of the instrument panel between the clock and the speedometer. 2. Insert a thin-bladed tool into the cavity and press the reset button.

Volvo 960 (1991 - 1995)

30
9 3
40

20
20

10
6

km/h

005000
mph

OM1033

1. Remove the plug from the face of the instrument panel between the clock and the speedometer. 2. Insert a thin-bladed tool into the cavity and press the reset button.

319

Omitec Hopton Industrial Estate London Road Devizes Wiltshire SN10 2EU United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0) 1380 732000 Fax: +44 (0) 1380 732001 email: sales@omitec.com web: www.omitec.com